Canon EOS 6D User manual

Canon EOS 6D User manual
EOS 6D (WG)
EOS 6D (N)
ENGLISH
The EOS 6D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi and GPS functions.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 6D (WG/N) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a
full-frame (approx. 35.8 x 23.9 mm) CMOS sensor with approx. 20.2
effective megapixels, DIGIC 5+, high-precision and high-speed 11-point
AF, approx. 4.5 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, Full HighDefinition (Full HD) movie shooting, Wi-Fi*, and GPS*.
* The EOS 6D (N) does not have the Wi-Fi and GPS functions.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.382-384) and “Handling Precautions” (p.16, 386). Also,
read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity:
• SD memory cards
• SDHC memory cards*
• SDXC memory cards*
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/
writing speed as shown in the table.
Compression Method (p.216)
Card
IPB
6 MB/sec. or faster
ALL-I (I-only)
20 MB/sec. or faster
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
 If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
3
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Wide Strap
EW-EOS6D
Battery Pack
LP-E6
(with protective cover)
Interface Cable IFC-200U
Battery Charger
LC-E6/LC-E6E*
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution Disk
(Software)
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power
cord.)
 The Instruction Manuals provided are listed on the next page.
 If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
 Depending on the Lens Kit type, lens instruction manuals may also be included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (p.5).
The lens instruction manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold individually. Note
that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with
the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
4
Instruction Manuals
Camera Basic Instruction Manual, Wi-Fi Function
Basic Instruction Manual and GPS Function
Instruction Manual
The booklet is composed of Camera Instruction Manual
(Basic-version), Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual (Basicversion), and GPS Function Instruction Manual (Fullversion). More detailed Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can
be downloaded from the Canon website.
Downloading and Viewing the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
1
Download the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
Instruction Manuals.
Instruction Manuals Available for Download
• Camera Instruction Manual
• Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual
• Camera Basic Instruction Manual, Wi-Fi Function Basic
Instruction Manual and GPS Function Instruction Manual
• Lens Instruction Manuals
• Software Instruction Manuals
2 View the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.
5
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<9> <V> <U>
<0>
0, 9, 7, 8
: Indicates the Main Dial.
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
: Indicates the Multi-controller and the push
direction.
: Indicates the Setting button.
: Indicates that the corresponding function
remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or
16 sec. respectively after you let go of the
button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button and changing the setting.
M
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that the
function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.24).
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Problem-solving advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
has been set to <1> and the <R> switch has been set to the
left (Multi function lock released) (p.34, 47).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with an
EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.
6
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
Getting Started
27
Basic Shooting
65
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
91
Image Settings
101
Advanced Operations
141
Flash Photography
169
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
179
Shooting Movies
203
Image Playback
235
Post-Processing Images
271
Sensor Cleaning
279
Printing Images
285
Customizing the Camera
301
Reference
331
Downloading Images to Your Computer
387
7
Contents
Introduction
2
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 3
Item Check List................................................................................. 4
Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 5
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 6
Chapters........................................................................................... 7
Index to Features ........................................................................... 14
Handling Precautions .................................................................... 16
Quick Start Guide ........................................................................... 18
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 20
1
Getting Started
27
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 28
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 30
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 31
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 34
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 36
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 38
Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 39
About the Lens Image Stabilizer..................................................... 42
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 43
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 49
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 51
Before You Start ............................................................................. 53
Formatting the Card .................................................................... 53
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................ 55
Setting the Image Review Time .................................................. 55
Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ................................................. 56
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ............................ 56
Q Displaying the Electronic Level............................................... 60
8
Feature Guide and Help ................................................................. 63
Contents
2
Basic Shooting
65
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................66
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................69
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................71
8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................74
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 75
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 76
4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................77
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 78
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................79
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................80
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................ 81
Q Quick Control............................................................................. 83
Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................84
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type .................................................... 87
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
91
f: Selecting the AF Operation ..................................................... 92
S Selecting AF Points .................................................................. 94
When Autofocus Fails ..................................................................... 96
MF: Manual Focusing .................................................................. 97
i Selecting the Drive Mode..........................................................98
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 100
4
Image Settings
101
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 102
i: Setting the ISO Speed ......................................................... 106
A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 112
A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 115
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 118
9
Contents
Setting the White Balance ............................................................ 120
O Custom White Balance ....................................................... 121
P Setting the Color Temperature ........................................... 122
White Balance Correction............................................................. 123
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 125
Noise Reduction Settings ............................................................. 126
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 130
Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction.... 131
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 134
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 136
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 138
Setting the Color Space................................................................ 140
5
Advanced Operations
141
d: Program AE ............................................................................ 142
s: Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 144
f: Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 146
Depth of Field Preview .............................................................. 147
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 148
q Selecting the Metering Mode.................................................. 149
Setting Exposure Compensation .................................................. 151
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)........................................... 152
A AE Lock................................................................................... 153
F: Bulb Exposures....................................................................... 154
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting .............................. 155
P Multiple Exposures ................................................................. 158
2 Mirror Lockup ........................................................................ 165
Using the Eyepiece Cover............................................................ 166
F Using a Remote Switch ............................................................ 167
R Remote Control Shooting .......................................................... 167
10
Contents
6
Flash Photography
169
D Flash Photography .................................................................... 170
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 172
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
179
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 180
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................185
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 187
Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 192
Focusing Manually ........................................................................ 199
8
Shooting Movies
203
k Shooting Movies .................................................................... 204
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................215
Setting the Movie-Recording Size.................................................216
Setting the Sound Recording ........................................................218
Setting the Time Code ..................................................................220
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 223
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 225
9
Image Playback
235
x Image Playback .....................................................................236
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 238
He Searching for Images Quickly ............................................ 242
u Magnified View ....................................................................... 244
b Rotating the Image ................................................................. 246
Setting Ratings.............................................................................. 247
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 249
k Enjoying Movies .....................................................................251
k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 253
11
Contents
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 255
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 257
Viewing the Images on TV............................................................ 261
K Protecting Images .................................................................. 265
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 267
Changing Image Playback Settings ............................................. 269
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ...................................... 269
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images .............................................. 270
10
Post-Processing Images
271
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera........................... 272
S Resize..................................................................................... 277
11
Sensor Cleaning
279
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning .................................................. 280
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 281
Manual Sensor Cleaning .............................................................. 283
12
Printing Images
285
Preparing to Print.......................................................................... 286
w Printing ................................................................................... 288
Trimming the Image .................................................................. 293
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 295
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ................................. 298
p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 299
13
Customizing the Camera
301
Setting Custom Functions ............................................................ 302
Custom Functions ........................................................................ 303
Custom Function Settings ............................................................ 304
12
Contents
C.Fn I: Exposure ....................................................................... 304
C.Fn II: Autofocus .....................................................................307
C.Fn III: Operation/Others ......................................................... 311
8: AF Microadjustment ...............................................................314
8: Custom Controls .................................................................... 320
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 327
w Register Custom Shooting Modes ..........................................328
14
Reference
331
B Button Functions ................................................................ 332
Checking the Battery Information.................................................. 334
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 338
Using Eye-Fi Cards....................................................................... 339
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode .............. 342
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 346
System Map .................................................................................. 354
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................356
Error Codes...................................................................................370
Specifications ................................................................................371
Safety Precautions ....................................................................... 382
Handling Precautions: EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM ................ 385
15
Downloading Images to Your Computer
387
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................388
About the Software ....................................................................... 390
Installing the Software................................................................... 392
Index ............................................................................................. 394
13
Index to Features
Power
AF
Charging the battery
 p.28
AF operation
 p.92
Battery check
 p.35
AF point selection
 p.94
Battery information check  p.334
AF Microadjustment
 p.314
Household power outlet  p.338
Manual focusing
 p.97
Auto power off
 p.55
Card
Format
 p.149
 p.53
Release shutter without
card
 p.32
Lens
Attaching/Detaching
 p.39
Zoom
 p.40
Image Stabilizer
 p.42
Basic Settings
Language
 p.38
Date/Time/Zone
 p.36
Beeper
 p.346
Copyright information
 p.138
Clear all camera settings  p.56
Drive
Drive mode
 p.98
Self-timer
 p.100
Maximum burst
 p.105
Recording Images
Create/select a folder
 p.134
File numbering
 p.136
Image Quality
Image-recording quality  p.102
ISO speed
 p.106
Picture Style
 p.112
White balance
 p.120
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.125
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment
 p.43
Eyepiece cover
 p.166
Electronic level
 p.61
LCD Monitor
Brightness adjustment
 p.269
Electronic level
 p.60
Feature guide
 p.63
Help
 p.64
14
Metering
Metering mode
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
 p.126
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.128
Highlight tone priority
 p.130
Peripheral illumination
correction
 p.131
Chromatic aberration
correction
 p.132
Color space
 p.140
Index to Features
Shooting
Playback
Shooting mode
 p.24
HDR
 p.155
Multiple exposures
 p.158
Mirror lockup
 p.165
Depth-of-field preview
 p.147
Remote control
 p.167
Quick Control
 p.49
Exposure Adjustment
Exposure compensation  p.151
AEB
 p.152
AE lock
 p.153
Safety shift
 p.306
Flash
External flash
 p.169
External flash function
settings
 p.172
External Speedlite
Custom Functions
 p.177
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
 p.179
Focusing
 p.192
Aspect ratio
 p.188
Image review time
 p.55
Single-image display
 p.236
Shooting information display  p.238
Index display
 p.242
Image browsing (Jump display)  p.243
Magnified view
 p.244
Image rotate
 p.246
Rating
 p.247
Movie playback
 p.253
Slide show
 p.257
Viewing images on TV
 p.261
Protect
 p.265
Erase
 p.267
Image Editing
RAW image processing  p.272
Resize
 p.277
Printing
PictBridge
Print Order (DPOF)
Photobook Set-up
 p.286
 p.295
 p.299
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.303
Custom Controls
 p.320
My Menu
 p.327
Custom shooting mode  p.328
Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction
Sensor cleaning
 p.280
Append Dust Delete Data  p.281
Movie Shooting
Movie shooting
 p.203
Movie recording size
 p.216
Sound recording
 p.218
Time code
 p.220
Still photo shooting
 p.213
Video snapshot
 p.225
Wi-Fi/GPS*
Wi-Fi
 Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual
GPS
 GPS Function Instruction Manual
* The EOS 6D (N) does not have the
Wi-Fi and GPS functions.
15
Handling Precautions
Also read “Handling Precautions” on page 386.
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
 To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly
closed.
 This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, and salt to get
on the camera.
 If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,
or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
 Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause
a malfunction.
 Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or
salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
 If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.
High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
16
Handling Precautions
 Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
 Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent
the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure
it is working properly.
17
Quick Start Guide
1
2
Insert the battery (p.30).
 To charge the battery, see page 28.
Insert a card (p.31).
 With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the
card slot.
3
Attach the lens (p.39).
4
Set the lens focus mode switch
to <f> (p.39).
5
18
 Align it with the red dot.
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.34).
 When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screens, see
page 36.
Quick Start Guide
6
While holding down the center
of the Mode Dial, set it to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.66).
 All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
7
Focus the subject (p.44).
8
Take the picture (p.44).
9
Review the picture (p.55).
 Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus the
subject.
 Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
 The captured image will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
 To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.236).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.179).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.236).
 To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.267).
19
Nomenclature
LCD panel (p.22)
<R> Drive mode selection button (p.98)
<f> AF operation selection button (p.92)
<i> ISO speed
setting button (p.106)
<q> Metering mode
selection button (p.149)
Lens mount index (p.39)
Flash-sync contacts
<U> LCD panel
illumination button (p.48)
Hot shoe (p.170)
<6> Main Dial
(p.45)
Mode Dial lock release
button (p.45)
Mode Dial (p.24)
Shutter button
(p.44)
Strap mount
(p.27)
Self-timer lamp
(p.100)
Speaker
(p.253)
Microphone
(p.219)
Remote control
sensor (p.167)
Lens release
button (p.40)
Grip (Battery
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole
(p.338)
Depth-of-field preview button
(p.147)
Mirror (p.165, 283)
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
Contacts (p.17)
<q/C>Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal (p.264/286, 388)
<F> Remote control terminal (N3 type) (p.167)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.219)
Body cap (p.39)
20
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.261)
Nomenclature
<p> AF start button
(p.44, 181, 211)
<V> Focal plane mark
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch (p.179/203)
<0> Start/Stop button (p.180, 204)
<A> AE lock/
FE lock button (p.153/170)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.43)
<S> AF point selection
button (p.94)
Eyecup (p.166)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<Q> Quick Control
button (p.49)
Strap mount
(p.27)
Power switch (p.34)
<M>
Menu button (p.51)
Card slot
cover (p.31)
<B>
Info button
(p.48, 60, 64, 182,
210, 236, 332)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.30)
LCD monitor (p.51, 269)
Battery compartment
cover (p.30)
Tripod socket
Access lamp (p.33)
<u> Index/Magnify/Reduce
button (p.242/244)
<x> Playback button (p.236)
<9> Multi-controller (p.47)
Multi function lock
switch (p.47)
<0> Setting button (p.51)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.46)
<L> Erase button (p.267)
Card slot (p.31)
21
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Drive mode (p.98)
u Single shooting
i Continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous
shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./
Remote control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./
Remote control
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.130)
<g> ISO speed (p.106)
ISO speed (p.106)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Error No.
Remaining images to record
<h> AEB (p.152)
Metering mode (p.149)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
AF operation (p.92)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
4L
Manual focus
Wi-Fi function
<k/l>
12
<w>
HDR shooting
(p.155)
Battery check (p.35)
<r> GPS
acquisition status
<x> Logging function
<M> Multi Shot Noise
Reduction (p.126)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.158)
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
(p.151)
AEB range (p.152)
Flash exposure compensation
amount (p.170)
Electronic level
Aperture
AF point selection
([ -- -- -- ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card Err)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
22
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
AF points (p.94)
(Superimposed display)
Focusing screen (p.312)
Spot metering circle (p.150)
<g> ISO speed
(p.106)
<o> Focus
confirmation
light (p.67)
<h> Warning symbol (p.313)
<z> Battery check (p.35)
<A> AE lock (p.153) /
AEB in-progress (p.152)
<D> Flash-ready (p.170)
Improper FE lock warning
<d> FE lock (p.170) /
FEB in-progress (p.176)
<e> High-speed sync (p.175)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.170)
Shutter speed (p.144)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
Max. burst (p.105)
Number of remaining multiple
exposures (p.160)
ISO speed (p.106)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.130)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.151)
AEB range (p.152)
Flash exposure compensation amount
(p.170)
Electronic level (p.61)
AF point selection
([ -- -- -- ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card)
No card warning (Card)
Aperture (p.146)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
23
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial
lock release button).
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control
for shooting various subjects.
d : Program AE (p.142)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.144)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.146)
a : Manual exposure (p.148)
F : Bulb (p.154)
Basic Zone
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting
mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF
operation, menu settings,
etc., to the w or x Mode
Dial setting and shoot (p.328).
All you do is press the shutter
button. The camera sets everything
to suit the subject or scene.
A: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.66)
C : Creative Auto (p.71)
8 : Special scene (p.74)
2 : Portrait (p.75)
3 : Landscape (p.76)
4 : Close-up (p.77)
5 : Sports (p.78)
6 : Night Portrait (p.79)
F : Handheld Night Scene (p.80)
G : HDR Backlight Control (p.81)
24
Nomenclature
Lens
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
Focus mode switch (p.39)
Distance scale
Infrared index
Hood mount (p.41)
Zoom ring (p.40)
φ77mm filter thread
(front of lens)
Zoom position
index (p.40)
Focusing ring (p.97, 199)
Contacts (p.386)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.42)
Lens mount index (p.39)
25
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N (p.28).
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N (p.28).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
26
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
 The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.166).
Eyepiece cover
27
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E6
the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E6
 As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E6E
LC-E6E
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Level
0 - 49%
50 - 74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Color
Orange
Green
Charge Lamp
Indicator
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
 It takes approx. 2.5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room
temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly
depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).
28
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Recharge the battery before using.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <
> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.334) and purchase
a new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.334) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
 The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N.
29
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6 (or LP-E6N) into the camera.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Only Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.28) to
the battery.
30
Installing and Removing the Card
The camera can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card. UHS-I
Speed Class SDHC and SDXC memory cards can also be used. The
captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
(p.35) will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
Possible shots
31
Installing and Removing the Card
 The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.346).
Removing the Card
1
Access lamp
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
 Gently push in the card, then let go to
eject it.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
32
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.136).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.53). The card
may then return to normal.
 Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
33
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the Date/Time/Zone setting screen
appears, see page 36 to set the Date/Time/Zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor
 Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
 You can still shoot during sensor
cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.44) to stop the
sensor cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a problem.
3 About Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1
minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway (p.44).
 You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.55).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
card finishes recording the image.
34
Turning on the Power
z Checking the Battery Level
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon (b) indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Icon
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10
9-1
0
Number of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
1090 approx. shots
980 approx. shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
 Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E13
• With LP-E6 x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F):
approx. 480 shots.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 181.
 See [54: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition in detail (p.334).
 If size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG-E13, a four-level
indicator will be displayed. ([x/m] will not be displayed.)
35
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the Date/Time/Zone setting screens will appear.
Follow the steps below to set the time zone first. If you set the camera
to the correct time zone for where you currently live, when you travel to
another time zone you can simply set the camera to the correct time
zone for your destination to update the camera’s date/time
automatically.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
 Press the <V> key to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Press the <U> key to select the
time zone box.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <V> key to select the time
zone, then press <0>. (Returns to
<s>.)
 The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 51-52.
 The time displayed on the upper right is the time difference compared
with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see your time
zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC.
36
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the date and time.
4 Set
 Press the <U> key to select the
number.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <V> key to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to <s>.)
the Daylight Saving Time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Press the <U> key to select [Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <V> key to select [Z],
then press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The Date/Time/Zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery
becomes exhausted, the date/time/zone may be reset. If this happens, set
the time zone and date/time again.
 The date/time that was set will start from when you press <0> in step 6.
 After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time has been
set.
37
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <U> key to select the
[52] tab.
 Press the <V> key to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Press the <V> key to select the
language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
38
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera
cannot be used with EF-S and EF-M lenses.
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the red dots on the lens and
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
the lens focus mode switch to
3 Set
<AF>.
 <AF> stands for Autofocus.
 If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
39
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
About Zooming
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus slightly.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrows.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 To owners of the EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens:
You can prevent the lens from extending
out while you are carrying it around. Set
the zoom ring to the 24mm wide-angle
end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever
to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be
locked only at the wide-angle end.
40
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens Hood
A lens hood can block unwanted light and protect the front of the lens
from rain, snow, dust, etc. Before storing the lens in a bag, etc., you can
attach the hood in reverse.
If the Lens Hood and Lens Have a Mount Index
1
Align the red dots on the hood
and lens edges, and turn the
hood as shown by the arrow.
the hood as shown in the
2 Turn
illustration.
 Turn the hood clockwise until it
attaches securely.
If Neither the Lens Hood Nor the Lens Have a Mount Index
Attach the hood.
 Turn the hood as shown by the arrow
until it attaches securely.
 If the lens has a mount index and you do not attach the hood properly, it
may obstruct the image’s periphery, making it look dark.
 When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood when
turning it. Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the
hood, resulting in failure to turn.
41
About the Lens Image Stabilizer
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
1
Set the Image Stabilizer switch to
<1>.
 Also set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
 The Image Stabilizer will operate.
the picture.
3 Take
 When the picture looks steady in the
viewfinder, press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
 The Image Stabilizer cannot correct “subject blur”, when the subject
moves at the time of exposure.
 For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image
Stabilizer misoperation may occur.
 The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
 The Image Stabilizer may not be effective when you use the
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM lens for panned shots.
 The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to
either <AF> or <MF>.
 When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>
with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to
<2> is recommended.
 The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
 With the EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, the Image Stabilizer mode
may switch automatically to suit the shooting conditions.
42
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.166).
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (10 types, sold
separately) is recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 179.
43
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel (0).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 In Creative Zone modes, pressing the <p> button is the same as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
 Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
44
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i>, the respective function
remains selected for the duration of the
timer (9). During this time, you can
turn the <6> dial to set the desired
setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to set the
desired setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are also possible while the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.47).
45
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i>, the respective function
remains selected for the duration of the
timer (9). During this time, you can
turn the <5> dial to set the desired
setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to set the
desired setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are also possible while the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.47).
46
Basic Operation
9 Multi-controller
The Multi-controller <9> has eight keys which tilt in the directions
shown by the arrows.
 Use the eight keys to select the AF
point, correct the white balance,
move the AF point or magnifying
frame during Live View shooting,
scroll around magnified images
during playback, etc.
 For menus and the Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions
<V> <U>. It does not work in
diagonal directions.
R Multi function Lock
With [8C.Fn III -3: Multi function lock] set (p.313) and the <R>
switch set to the right, it prevents the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and
Multi-controller from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.
<R> switch set to the left:
Lock released
<R> switch set to the right:
Lock engaged
If the <R> switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. On the shooting function settings display (p.48), [LOCK] will be
displayed.
47
Basic Operation
U LCD Panel Illumination
Turn on (9)/off the LCD panel
illumination by pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the
shutter button completely will turn off the
LCD panel illumination.
Displaying Shooting Function Settings
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the shooting
function settings will be displayed.
With the shooting settings displayed, you can turn the Mode Dial to see
the settings for each shooting mode (p.333).
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.49).
Press the <B> button again to turn off the display.
48
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.
1
Press the <Q> button.
 The Quick Control screen will appear
(7).
the desired function.
2 Set
 Press the <V> <U> key to select
a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure,
see page 83.
49
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Sample Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.146)
Flash exposure compensation (p.170)
AE lock*1 (p.153)
Highlight tone priority*1 (p.130)
Shutter speed (p.144)
Shooting mode*1 (p.24)
Exposure
compensation/AEB
setting (p.151, 152)
ISO speed (p.106)
Wi-Fi function*2
Picture Style (p.112)
Custom Controls
(p.320)
AF operation (p.92)
Image-recording
quality (p.102)
White balance (p.120)
AF point (p.94)
White balance correction (p.123)
Drive mode (p.98)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)
Metering mode (p.149)
White balance bracketing (p.124)
*1: These functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.
*2: Refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual for Wi-Fi function settings.
Function Setting Screen
 <0>
50
 Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting. You can also press
the <U> key to change some of the
settings. Also, some functions can be
set by pressing the <B> button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the Quick Control screen.
> (Custom Controls,
 When you select <
p.320) or <
> (AF point, p.94) and
press the <M> button, the shooting
function settings display will reappear.
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use
the <M> button, <V> <U> keys, and <0> button on the
camera back.
<M> button
<0> button
LCD monitor
<V> <U>
Menus in Basic Zone Modes
* Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
Menus in Creative Zone Modes
3 Playback
A Live View shooting
z Shooting
5 Set-up
8 Custom
Functions
9 My Menu
Tab
Menu items
Menu settings
51
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Press the <U> key to select a
menu tab.
 For example, the [z4] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the forth
tab from the left [ ] is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Press the <V> key to select the
item, then press <0>.
Select the setting.
4  Press the <V> or <U> key to
select the desired setting. (Some
settings require you to press either
the <V> or <U> key to select
them.)
 The current setting is indicated in blue.
the desired setting.
5 Set
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to return to
the shooting function settings display.
 In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step
4, you can also turn the <5> dial to select certain settings.
 The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 To cancel, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 346.
52
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with the camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the
card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Format
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The card will be formatted.
 When the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.
 For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
53
Before You Start
Execute [Format card] in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.370).
About Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase data in the card.
 Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors in the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
54
Before You Start
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after capture. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To
not have the image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
55
Before You Start
3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On
The shooting settings display (p.48) can be set to remain on even when
you press the shutter button halfway.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD off/on
btn], then press <0>. The available
settings are described below. Select one,
then press <0>.
[Remains on]: Display remains on even when you press the shutter
button halfway. To turn off display, press the
<B> button.
[Shutter btn.]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. When you let go of the shutter
button, the display will turn on.
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to
their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the following
default settings:
56
Before You Start
Shooting Settings
AF operation
One-Shot AF
AF point
selection
Automatic
selection
Metering mode
q (Evaluative
metering)
ISO speed
Auto
ISO speed range
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 25600
Multiple exposure Disable
HDR Mode
Disable HDR
Auto ISO range
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 12800
Mirror lockup
Disable
Custom
Functions
Unchanged
Flash function
settings
Unchanged
ISO Auto minimum Auto
shutter speed
Drive mode
u (Single
shooting)
Exposure
Canceled
compensation/AEB
Flash exposure
compensation
0 (Zero)
57
Before You Start
Image-recording Settings
Image quality
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
73
Auto
Peripheral
illumination
correction
Enable/
Correction
data retained
Camera Settings
Auto power off
Beep
Release shutter
without card
1 min.
Enable
Image review
Highlight alert
AF point display
Playback grid
Histogram display
Magnification
(Approx.)
2 sec.
Disable
Disable
Off
Brightness
Disable
e (10 images)
OnzD
High ISO speed noise Standard
reduction
Control over HDMI
Image jump w/6
Auto rotate
LCD brightness
LCD off/on button
Date/Time/Zone
Language
Video system
Feature guide
z button display
options
Highlight tone
priority
Disable
Custom shooting
mode
Unchanged
File numbering
Auto cleaning
Dust Delete Data
Continuous
Enable
Erase
Copyright
information
Unchanged
Eye-Fi transmission
My Menu settings
Display from My Menu
GPS
Wi-Fi
Disable
Unchanged
Disable
Disable
Disable
Standard
Enable/
Chromatic aberration
Correction
correction
data retained
White balance
Custom White
Balance
Q (Auto)
Canceled
White balance
correction
Canceled
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Color space
sRGB
Long exposure noise
Disable
reduction
Enable
2x
Remains on
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Enable
All items
selected
Wi-Fi and GPS settings are explained in their respective instruction manuals.
58
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Movie Shooting Settings
AF method
FlexiZone - Single
FlexiZone - Single
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Grid display
Off
Metering timer
16 sec.
Aspect ratio
3:2
Grid display
Off
Exposure
simulation
Enable
Movie recording
size
1920x1080/IPB
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Metering timer
16 sec.
Live View
shooting
Enable
AF method
Sound recording Auto
Time code
Count up
Unchanged
Start time
setting
Unchanged
Movie recording Unchanged
count
Movie playback
count
Unchanged
Drop frame
Unchanged
Video snapshot
Disable
59
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor, and in the
viewfinder or on the LCD panel to help correct camera tilt. Note that you
can check only the horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.332).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°
increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is corrected.
Horizontal level
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
bigger.
With this same procedure, you can display the electronic level during Live
View shooting and before shooting a movie (p.182, 210). Note that the
electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting. (The electronic
level will disappear when you start shooting a movie.)
60
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
The electronic level display in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel
uses the exposure level indicator. Note that the electronic level is only
displayed when shooting in horizontal orientation. It is not displayed in
vertical orientation.
1
Select Custom Functions III.
 Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:
Operation/Others], then press
<0>.
C.Fn III -5 [Custom
2 Select
Controls].
 Press the <U> key to select [5:
Custom Controls], then press <0>.
[e].
3 Select
 Select [e: DOF preview button],
then press <0>.
[Q].
4 Select
 Select [Q: VF electronic level],
then press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
61
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
the electronic level.
5 Display
 Press the Depth-of-field preview
button.
 The horizontal tilt up to ±9° in 1°
4° right tilt
4° left tilt
increments will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel
using the exposure level indicator.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway
displays the exposure level.
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of ±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
bigger.
 If the Depth-of-field preview button has been assigned with the [VF
electronic level], depth-of-field preview will not work.
62
Feature Guide and Help
While you set some function, the feature’s description can be displayed.
Feature Guide
The Feature guide displays a simple description of the respective
shooting mode, function or option. It appears when you change the
shooting mode or set a shooting function, Live View shooting, Movie
shooting, or Quick Control for playback. When you select a function or
option on the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description
appears. When you proceed with the operation, the Feature guide will
disappear.
 Shooting mode (Sample)
 Quick Control (Sample)
Shooting settings
Live View shooting
Playback
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>.
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
63
Feature Guide and Help
Help
When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen,
pressing the <B> button displays the function’s description (Help).
If the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the
right edge. You can turn the <5> dial to scroll down.
 Example: [z4: Long exp. noise reduction]
B

Scroll bar
 Example: [8C.Fn I -1: Exposure level increments]
B

 Example: [8C.Fn II -1: Tracking sensitivity]
B

64
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results.
ic
Z
on
e
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the
camera sets everything automatically (p.83, 342). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, the main
shooting function settings cannot be changed.
s
Ba
65
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.69).
1
AF point
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
any AF point over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and generally the closest object will
be focused.
 Aiming the center AF point over the
subject will make focusing easier.
the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 The AF point achieving focus flashes
briefly in red. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will light up.
Focus confirmation light
66
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative
Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D> and shoot (p.112).
FAQ
 The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not
achieved.
Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the
shutter button halfway (p.44). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
 Multiple AF points flash simultaneously.
This indicates that focus is achieved at all those AF points. When the
AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the picture.
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation
light <o> does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You
can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.69) will not work in this case.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
67
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite
(p.170) (sold separately) is recommended.
 When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it can obstruct the flash coverage. If
the subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with
flash.
In Basic Zone modes except <G>, using a Canon EX-series Speedlite
(sold separately) in low-light or backlit conditions can capture the subject
brightly while avoiding camera shake or reduce backlit shadows.
68
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus
a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the
shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is
called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone
modes (except <5> Sports).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject
continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you
keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter
button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take
the picture, press the shutter button completely.
69
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 179.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the center AF point <
> on the
subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture will be taken and the
captured image is displayed on the
LCD monitor.
 After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to end the
Live View shooting.
70
C Creative Auto Shooting
In the <C> mode, you can easily change the depth of field and drive
mode. You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your
images. The default settings are the same as the <A> mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
3 Set
 Press the <V> key to select a
function.
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.63) will appear.
 For setting procedure and details on
each function, see pages 72-73.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
71
C Creative Auto Shooting
(1)
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(2)
(3)
Battery check
Image-recording quality
Possible shots
Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following:
(1) Ambience-based shots
You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired ambience. You
can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see
page 84.
(2) Blurring/sharpening the background
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will
look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting
Portraits” on page 75. Set it by pressing the <U> key. You can
also use the <6> or <5> dial to move the mark.
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred. If flash is used, this setting will not be
applied.
72
C Creative Auto Shooting
(3) Drive mode: Press the <U> key to select the desired drive mode.
You can also select the drive mode by turning the <6> or <5>
dial, or pressing <0> to select it from a list.
<u> Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<i> Continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken continuously. You can shoot up to approx. 4.5 shots per
second.
<B> Silent single shooting:
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u>.
<M> Silent continuous shooting:
Continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.0 shots per second) with
less shooting sound than <i>.
< > Self-timer: 10 sec./Remote control:
<
> Self-timer: 2 sec./Remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds or 2 seconds after you press
the shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.
When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 100.
73
8: Special Scene Mode
When you set a shooting mode suiting the scene, the camera sets the
optimum settings automatically.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the shooting mode.
3 Select
 Press the <V> key to select the
shooting mode section.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select
a shooting mode.
 You can also select a shooting mode
from a list by selecting the shooting
mode section and pressing <0>.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Shooting Mode
2
Portrait
Page
p.75
3
Landscape
p.76
4
Close-up
p.77
5
Sports
p.78
74
Shooting Mode
Night Portrait
Page
p.79
F
Handheld Night Scene
p.80
G
HDR Backlight Control
p.81
6
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
 The further the distance between the subject and background,
the better.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better in front of a plain, dark background.
 Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
 Focus the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red. For closeups of the face, focus the eyes.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). If you hold down the
shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and
facial expressions (max. approx. 4.5 shots/sec.).
75
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
 With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
 Shooting night scenes.
When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
76
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the
<4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
 Use a simple background.
A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.
 Move as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on
the top left of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the
subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
 With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
77
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a
moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.
Shooting Tips
 Use a telephoto lens.
Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.
 Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> will blink.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, continuous shooting (max. approx. 4.5
shots per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect to capture the
movement of the subject.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady
and shoot.
78
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Flash is required.
Using a tripod is also recommended.
Shooting Tips
 Use a wide-angle lens, Speedlite, and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
 Also shoot in another shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
 Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
 If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as
in a night scene. In such a case, you should set the AF method to [Quick
mode] and shoot. If it is still difficult to focus, set the lens’ focus mode
switch to [MF] and focus manually.
79
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Normally, a tripod is necessary to steady your camera when shooting a
night scene. However, with the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode,
you can shoot night scenes while handholding the camera. In this
mode, four shots are taken continuously for each picture, and a
resulting bright image with reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. If any of the four
shots are greatly misaligned due to camera shake, etc., they may
not align properly in the final image.
 When including a human subject:
With flash, you can shoot both the human subject and night scene
background while handholding the camera. To take a nice portrait,
the first shot will use flash. Tell the person not to move until all four
continuous shots are taken.
See the cautions on page 82.
80
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take a picture, three
continuous shots are taken at different exposures, and the resulting
image with the least loss of shadow detail due to backlighting and
widest tonal range is recorded.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. If any of the
three shots are greatly misaligned due to camera shake, etc., they
may not align properly in the final image.
 Even if a Speedlite is attached to the camera, it will not fire.
 See the cautions on page 82.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
81
Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene)
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as
in a night scene. In such a case, you should set the AF method to [Quick
mode] and shoot. If it is still difficult to focus, set the lens’ focus mode
switch to [MF] and focus manually.
 When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the
camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
 If you use flash when shooting dimly lit night scenes, or human subjects
in situations where the subject and background are both near enough to
be illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can
result in a blurry photo.
 Regarding flash coverage:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’ zoom position.
• When using a Speedlite with manual flash coverage switch, shoot with
the flash head retracted to the wide (normal) position.
Cautions for <G> (HDR Backlight Control)
 Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
 HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
Cautions for both <F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <G> (HDR
Backlight Control)
 Compared with other shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller.
 You cannot select RAW and RAW+JPEG. In other shooting modes, if
RAW is set, the image quality will be 73. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the
image will be recorded in the set JPEG quality.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement will leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or greatly misaligned
shots caused by camera shake.
 Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is completed.
 If the shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, direct printing is not
possible. Select another shooting mode and do direct printing.
82
Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting
function settings screen is displayed, you
can press the <Q> button to display the
Quick Control screen. The table below
indicates the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each
Basic Zone mode.
Example: Portrait mode
1 Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode.
2Press the <Q> button. (7)
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
3 Set the function.
 Press the <V> key to select a function. (This step is not
necessary in the A mode.)
 The selected function and Feature guide (p.63) will appear.
 Functions can also be selected with the <6> or <5> dial.
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o:
Default setting k: User selectable
: Not selectable
8
A C
2 3 4 5 6 F G
Function
u: Single shooting
o
o
k
o
o
k
o
o
o
i: Continuous shooting
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Q
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Drive mode B: Silent single shooting
(p.98)
M: Silent continuous shooting
Self-timer (p.100)
Ambience-based shots (p.84)
Light/scene-based shots (p.87)
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.72)
k
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, it will revert
to the default settings (except the self-timer).
83
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Except in the <A> and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can select the
ambience for shooting.
Ambience
C
Standard setting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Vivid
Soft
Warm
Intense
Cool
Brighter
Darker
Monochrome
8
4 5
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
6
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience Effect
2
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
1
Set the shooting mode to <C> or
<8>.
No setting
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Medium / High
Low / Medium / High
Blue / B/W / Sepia
 If the shooting mode is <8>, set
one of the following: <2>, <3>,
<4>, <5>, <6>, or <F>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
 Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
 You can check the ambience effect
on the screen.
the Quick Control screen,
4 On
select the desired ambience.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <V> key to select [
Standard setting]. [Ambiencebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
84
Shoot by Ambience Selection
 Press the <U> key to select the
desired ambience.
 The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
the ambience effect.
5 Set
 Press the <V> key to select the
effect bar so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom.
 Press the <U> key to select the
desired effect.
the picture.
6 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [
Standard setting].
 The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo.
 Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
 In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen may not
have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo. Set
[52: LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the Live View image while the
screen is unaffected by stray light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. When you press the <Q>
button, the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can set [Ambiencebased shots] and [Effect], then shoot with the viewfinder.
85
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [
Standard setting].
Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
Darker
The picture will look darker.
Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. <h> can be displayed on
the lower left in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set (p.313).
86
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <2>, <3>, <4>, and <5> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot
while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally, [
Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting
condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.84), you should first set [Light/scenebased shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
Lighting or Scene
8
2
3
4
5
Default setting
k
k
k
k
Daylight
k
k
k
k
Shade
k
k
k
k
Cloudy
k
k
k
k
Tungsten light
k
k
k
Fluorescent light
k
k
k
Sunset
k
k
k
k
1
Set the shooting mode to <8>.
 Set one of the following: <2>, <3>,
<4>, or <5>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
 Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
 You can check the resulting effect on
the screen.
87
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
the Quick Control screen,
4 On
select the lighting or scene type.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <V> key to select [
Default setting]. [Light/scenebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
 Press the <U> key to select the
desired lighting or scene type.
 The resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [
Default
setting].
 If you use flash, the setting will switch to [
Default setting]. (However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was
set.)
 If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the
lighting or scene type best matches the ambience you have set. In the
case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so the
ambience you set may not work well.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Pressing the <Q> button will
display the Quick Control screen. You can then set [Light/scene-based
shots] and shoot with the viewfinder.
88
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
Default setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
89
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The viewfinder has 11 AF points.
By selecting the optimum AF point,
you can compose the picture as
desired while autofocusing.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
 In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point are
set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
91
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation
is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<AF>.
the Mode Dial to a Creative
2 Turn
Zone mode.
3 Press the <f> button. (9)
the AF operation.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point(s) that achieved focus will light
up in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will
be displayed.
 With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the
same time focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
92
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to
focus again, or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.96).
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a subject
and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is convenient when
you want to focus a peripheral subject not covered by the AF points.
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF point selection (p.94) is automatic, the camera first
uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject
moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as
long as the subject is covered by another AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts moving,
the camera will detect the movement, change the AF operation
automatically to AI Servo AF, and keep tracking the moving subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus confirmation
light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be
locked in this case.
93
S Selecting AF PointsN
You can select an AF point for focusing from among eleven AF points.
In Basic Zone modes, the AF point will be selected automatically and
you cannot select the AF point.
1
Press the <S> button. (9)
 The selected AF point will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel.
 When all the AF points light up,
automatic AF point selection will be
set.
an AF point.
2 Select
 You can either use <9> or turn the
<6> or <5> dial to select an AF
point.
Selecting with the Multi-controller
 You can use <9> to select an AF
point.
 If all the AF points light up, automatic
AF point selection will be set.
 Press <0> to toggle between the
center AF point and automatic
selection.
94
S Selecting AF PointsN
Selecting with the Dials
 Turn the <6> dial to select an AF
point on the left or right or turn the
<5> dial to select an AF point above
or below.
 If all the AF points light up, automatic
AF point selection will be set.
 When you press the <S> button, the LCD panel displays the following:
• Automatic selection:
AF
• Manual selection: SEL (Center)/SEL AF (Off center)
 When using an EOS-dedicated external Speedlite, if focus cannot be
achieved with the AF-assist beam, select the center AF point.
AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures
Maximum lens aperture: f/3.2 - f/5.6
Cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected
simultaneously) is possible with the center AF point. The other AF
points are either vertical- or horizontal-line sensitive.
Maximum lens aperture: f/1.0 - f/2.8
Besides cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected
simultaneously), the center AF point can also perform high-precision,
vertical-line sensitive AF.* The other AF points are either vertical- or
horizontal-line sensitive.
* Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM, and EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.
If you use an Extender (sold separately) together with the lens and the
f/number becomes higher than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible
(except in [FlexiZoneAF (Single)] and [u Live mode] during Live View
shooting). For details, refer to the Extender’s instruction manual.
95
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light
<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects difficult to focus
 Very low-contrast subjects
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Extremely backlit and reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
 Near and far subjects covered by an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
 Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus before recomposing the shot (p.69).
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually (p.97).
For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [FlexiZoneAF
(Single)]/[u Live mode] during Live View shooting, see page 196.
96
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focusing
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
 <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point
which achieved focus will flash briefly in red and the focus confirmation light
<o> will light up in the viewfinder.
97
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided.
1
Press the <R> button. (9)
the drive mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
i : Continuous shooting (Max. approx. 4.5 shots/sec.)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken continuously.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u>.
M : Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i>.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 100. For remote control
shooting, see page 167.
98
i Selecting the Drive Mode
 If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than with normal
single or continuous shooting.
 When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
 i: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: At 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, and at the maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens). The
continuous shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed,
aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when using the
following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM,
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
99
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1 Press the <R> button. (9)
the self-timer.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select the
self-timer delay.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
k : 2-sec. self-timer
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 Two seconds before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.166). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still
lifes or bulb exposures.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.236) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.69) on
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <R> button.
100
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, lens peripheral
illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction,
and other functions.
 In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as
described in this chapter: Image-recording quality, lens
peripheral illumination and chromatic aberration correction,
folder creation and selection, and image file numbering.
 The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
101
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG
image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c.
There are three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41, 61 (p.104).
1
Select [Image quality].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality.
2 Select
 To select a RAW setting, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,
press the <U> key.
 On the upper right, the “**M
(megapixels) **** x ****” numbers
indicate the recorded pixel count, and
[***] is the number of possible shots
(displayed up to 9999).
 Press <0> to set it.
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1+73
1 only
61+74
 If [-] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
 The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD panel.
102
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
73
83
74
JPEG
84
7a
Pixels
File Size Possible
Printing Size
Recorded
(MB)
Shots
20M
A2
8.9M
A3
Maximum
Burst
6.0
1250
73 (1250)
3.1
2380
2380 (2380)
3.2
2300
2300 (2300)
1.7
4240
4240 (4240)
2.1
3450
3450 (3450)
1.1
6370
6370 (6370)
5.0M
A4
b*1
2.5M
9x13 cm
1.2
6130
6130 (6130)
c*2
0.3M
-
0.3
23070
23070 (23070)
1
14 (17)
8a
20M
A2
23.5
300
RAW 41
11M
A3
18.5
380
8 (10)
61
5.0M
A4
13.0
550
12 (17)
1
73
20M
20M
A2
A2
23.5+6.0
240
7 (8)
11M
20M
A3
A2
18.5+6.0
290
8 (9)
5.0M
20M
A4
A2
13.0+6.0
380
10 (12)
RAW 41
+
JPEG 73
61
73
*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.
 b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
 The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and
Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
 Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I class 8 GB card based on Canon’s
testing standards.
103
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
 If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording quality that was set. The two images will be recorded with the
same file numbers (file extension .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).
 The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8 (Normal), 3
(Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).
About RAW
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.272) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) While the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image according to different
conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
With all RAW images, you can use Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.390) to make various adjustments and then generate a
JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those adjustments.
To display RAW images on a computer, using the provided software is
recommended. Commercially-available software may not be able to display
RAW images. To see if RAW images taken with this camera are compatible
with other software, inquire the respective software manufacturer.
104
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed on the bottom right in the
viewfinder and on the shooting function
settings screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
 If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot
99 or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or
lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be
disabled temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst
will increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you
can resume continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst
listed in the table on page 103.
 Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in parentheses in the table on page 103 will
apply instead.
105
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.108).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 206 and 209.
1
Press the <i> button. (9)
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- 25600 in 1/3-stop increments.
 “A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.108). You can also press the
<B> button to set it to “A
(AUTO)”.
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
L, ISO 100 - 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - 25600, H1, H2
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
106
Flash Range
The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the flash range
will be.
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], you cannot select “L”
(equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, “H1” (equivalent to ISO 51200),
and “H2” (equivalent to ISO 102400) (p.130).
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to 102400) are
expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and
irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower than
usual.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
 If you shoot a movie when [Maximum: 25600] is set with [ISO speed
range] and ISO speed is set to ISO 16000/20000/25600, the ISO speed
will switch to ISO 12800 (during movie shooting with manual exposure).
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
 If you shoot a movie when 1. L (ISO 50) or 2. H1 (ISO 51200)/H2 (ISO
102400) is set, the ISO speed setting will switch to 1. ISO 100 or 2. H
(ISO 25600) respectively (during movie shooting with manual exposure).
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], you can use [ISO speed range] to
expand the settable ISO speed range from ISO 50 (L) to ISO 102400
(H2) (p.109).
 <h> can be displayed in the viewfinder when you set an expanded ISO
speed (L, H1, or H2) (p.313).
107
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed Setting
A /C /2 /4 /5 /6 /G
3
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 12800
F
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 25600
d /s /f /a
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 25600*1
F
ISO 400*1
With flash
ISO 400*1*2*3*4
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 1600
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto ISO range].
*2: If fill flash will result in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set.
*3: Except in the A, 6, and F modes.
*4: When using bounce flash with an external Speedlite in the C, 2, 3, 4, 5,
or <d> mode, the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 400 - 1600.
108
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (ISO 50) to H1
(ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 (ISO
102400).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
[ISO speed range].
2 Select
 Select [ISO speed range], then press
<0>.
the minimum limit.
3 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 Exit
 Press the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The menu reappears.
109
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100
- 25600. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - 12800, and the
maximum limit within ISO 200 - 25600 in whole-stop increments.
1
Select [Auto ISO range].
 Select [Auto ISO range], then press
<0>.
the minimum limit.
2 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Press the <V> key to select an ISO
speed, then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the <U> key to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The menu reappears.
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also apply to the ISO speed
safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speed (p.306).
110
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO
When Auto ISO is set, you can set the minimum shutter speed (1/250
sec. to 1 sec.) so that the automatically-set shutter speed is not too
slow.
This is convenient in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject. You can minimize both camera
shake and subject blur.
1
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
 Select [Min. shutter spd.], then
press <0>.
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
 Press the <U> key to select the
shutter speed, then press <0>.
 The menu reappears.
 If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto ISO range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
 With flash photography, [Min. shutter spd.] will not be applied.
111
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, <D> (Auto) is set automatically.
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Press the <V> key to select a
Picture Style, then press <0>.
 The Picture Style will be set and the
menu will reappear.
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and
sunsets in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.115), you can adjust the skin
tone.
112
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to
match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdued.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If you
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting
has been canceled.
<h> can be displayed in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set (p.313).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.118). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
113
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
About the Symbols
The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the
parameter settings, such as for [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each
Picture Style.
Symbols
g
114
Sharpness
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 117.
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
a parameter.
3 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
4 Set
 Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
 Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
115
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Parameter Settings and Effects
g Sharpness
0: Less sharp outline
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+7: Sharp outline
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
 To use the adjusted Picture Style, first select the adjusted Picture Style,
then shoot.
116
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.
kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
117
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles whose parameter settings such
as sharpness and contrast are different.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been
registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.390).
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
2 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press
<B>.
<0>.
3 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
 Press the <V> key to select the
base Picture Style, then press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that has been registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (provided
software), select the Picture Style
here.
118
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
5 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
6 Set
 Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” on pages 115-117.
 Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The Picture
Style selection screen will then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
 If the settings in a Picture Style
registered under [User Def. *] have
been modified from the base Picture
Style settings, the Picture Style’s
name will be displayed in blue.
 If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
 If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.56), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults. Picture Style registered via EOS
Utility (provided software) will have only their modified parameters
reverted to their default settings.
 To use the adjusted Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
119
3 Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the <Q> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If naturallooking colors cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white
balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white
object.
In Basic Zone modes, <Q> is set automatically.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the white balance.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Display
Q
W
E
R
Y
U
D
O
P
Mode
Auto
Daylight
Shade
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
Tungsten light
White fluorescent light
Flash use
Custom (p.121)
Color temperature (p.122)
Color Temperature (Approx. K: Kelvin)
3000 - 7000
5200
7000
6000
3200
4000
Automatically set*
2000 - 10000
2500 - 10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000K.
About White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with
software to make the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as
the basis for the color correction. With this function, pictures with natural
color shades can be taken.
120
3 Setting the White BalanceN
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1
Photograph a white object.
 The plain, white object should fill the
spot metering circle.
 Focus manually and set the standard
exposure for the white object.
 You can set any white balance.
Spot metering circle
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Turn the <5> dial to select the image
captured in step 1, then press <0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
 When the menu reappears, press the
<M> button to exit the menu.
[White balance].
4 Select
 Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
Select the custom white balance.
5  Select [
O],
then press <0>.
121
3 Setting the White BalanceN
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure
images, and images shot with another camera.
 Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can
produce a more accurate white balance.
 The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be
registered under [O]. If you execute step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 Set
 Select [P].
 Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
 The color temperature can be set from approx.
2500 K to 10000 K in 100 K increments.
 When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
 If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
122
3 White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color
can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
desired position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The color
in the respective direction will be
corrected.
 On the upper right, “Shift” indicates
the direction and correction amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
 <h> can be displayed on the lower left in the viewfinder when white
balance correction is set (p.313).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
123
3 White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images having a different color tone can be recorded
simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance
setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/green
bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White balance
bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points). Turning
the dial to the right sets the B/A
bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
 During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and
the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the normal number.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the shot to the card.
 You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing (p.305).
 “BKT” stands for bracketing.
124
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and the setting cannot be
changed.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or
flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come
out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
 If the HDR mode (p.155) or multiple exposure shooting (p.158) is set, the
Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable]. When the
HDR mode or multiple exposure shooting is canceled, the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will revert to the original setting.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disabled
in M or B modes] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the
<a> and <F> modes.
125
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 The setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
 [M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
Noise reduction with higher image quality than when [High] is
applied. For a single photo, four shots are taken in a burst and
merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
126
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
About [Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
 The following functions cannot be set: AEB, WB bracketing, [z4: Long
exp. noise reduction], [z4: HDR Mode], [z4: Multiple exposure],
and RAW image. If any of these has already been set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
 Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted
according to the [8C.Fn II -5: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
 If you turn off the power or change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode, movie shooting, or bulb, the setting will be changed to [Standard].
 If the images are greatly misaligned due to camera shake or if there is a
moving subject, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is completed.
 [z4: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.
 If [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set, direct printing is not possible.
Select a setting other than [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] and perform
direct printing.
If you play back a 1 image with the camera or print an image directly, the
effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. Check the
noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo
Professional (provided software, p.390).
127
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 The setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
 [Auto]
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 [Enable]
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may be able to reduce noise that cannot be
detected with the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
128
3 Noise Reduction SettingsN
 With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
129
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can minimize overexposed highlight areas.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
 Under the [z4] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
 With [Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed. When [Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Disable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to its
original setting.
 With [Enable], image noise (graininess and bandings, etc.) may increase
slightly more than with [Disable].
With [Enable], the settable range will be ISO 200 - 25600 (ISO 200 - 12800
for movie shooting). Also, the <A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled.
130
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. Both lens aberrations can be
corrected. The default settings are [Enable] for both corrections.
If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “About the Lens
Correction Data” on page 133.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.390).
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
131
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
If you play back a 1 image shot with the chromatic aberration corrected,
the image will be displayed on the camera without the chromatic aberration
correction applied. Check the chromatic aberration correction with Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.390).
132
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
About the Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction
data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx. 25 lenses. If
you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration
Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image and check it
after shooting.
 Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
 If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
 If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will
be lower.
133
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Select folder].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
[Create folder].
2 Select
 Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.
a new folder.
3 Create
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
134
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
About Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.137) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The final five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
other five characters in each name are different.
135
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
1
Select [File numbering].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient when
you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in
multiple cards or folders into one folder in your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If
you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you
use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
XXX-0051
Card-2
XXX-0052
Next sequential file number
136
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-1
100
101
XXX-0051
XXX-0052
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if you want to
organize images according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file
numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to save images
with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
XXX-0051
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
XXX-0001
Card-1
100
101
XXX-0051
XXX-0001
File numbering is reset.
Manual Reset
To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically
and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation screen.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” for movies.
137
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Press the <Q> button, and the text
palette will be highlighted in a color
frame. Text can be entered.
 Press the <V> <U> keys to
move the and select a character,
then press <0> to enter it.
 You can enter up to 63 characters.
 To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button.
 The information will be saved and the
screen will return to step 2.
138
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2 on the preceding page,
you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you
entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]
information.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(provided software, p.390).
139
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
About Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know
about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with software for computer will therefore be
required.
 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space,
the first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
140
5
Advanced Operations
In Creative Zone modes, you
can set the shutter speed and/or
aperture to set the exposure as
desired. By changing the
camera settings, you can obtain
various results.
 The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0).
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode,
see page 342.
Set the <R> switch to the left.
141
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the selected AF point over the
subject. Then press the shutter button
halfway.
 The AF point which achieves focus
flashes in red, and the focus
confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder’s bottom right lights up
(when in One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
142
d: Program AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lower f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
 If the “4000” shutter speed and the higher f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions such the AF operation and metering
mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.342).
About Program Shift
 In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
 To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
 Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken.
 Program shift cannot be used with flash.
143
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure suiting the brightness
of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed
can freeze the action or a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can
create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the aperture is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
144
s: Shutter-Priority AE
 If the lower f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
 If the higher f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “4000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec. Also, “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
145
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject
brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller
aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within
acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole)
will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
Sharp foreground and background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6) (With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The shutter speed is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
146
f: Aperture-Priority AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/
number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
higher ISO speed.
 If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
aperture f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops
or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth of Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
 A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
 The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button
(p.180).
 The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is pressed.
147
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine
the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a
commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.106).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
Standard exposure index
the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed
Exposure level mark
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
 The exposure level mark <h> indicates
how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
the exposure and take the picture.
5 Set
 Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed
and aperture to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not obtain
the desired exposure effect.
148
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
 In [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for [Disabled
in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the
<a> and <F> modes (p.125).
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 23)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1 Press the <q> button. (9)
the metering mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
q: Evaluative metering
w: Partial metering
r: Spot metering
e: Center-weighted average metering
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The
metering is weighted at the center covering approx.
8.0% of the viewfinder area.
149
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or
scene. The metering is weighted at the center
covering approx. 3.5% of the viewfinder area.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is weighted at the center and then
averaged for the entire scene.
 With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w
(Partial), r (Spot), and e (Center-weighted average) metering modes,
the exposure is set when the photo is taken. (Pressing the shutter button
halfway does not lock the exposure.)
 When <r> is set, <h> can be displayed on the lower left in the
viewfinder (p.313).
150
Setting Exposure Compensation N
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the d/s/f shooting modes.
Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you
want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, you
should use the Quick Control (p.49) or follow the instructions for [z3:
Expo.comp./AEB] on the next page.
1
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Check the exposure level indicator.
 Press the shutter button halfway (0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
the exposure compensation
2 Set
amount.
 While looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <5> dial.
Decreased exposure for a darker image
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel the exposure
compensation, set the exposure
compensation amount back to <E>.
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is not set to [Disable], the image may
still look bright even if a darker exposure compensation amount has been set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the
<R> switch to the right to prevent the exposure compensation
amount from changing accidentally.
 If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
151
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z3] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press <0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. Press the <U> key to set
the exposure compensation amount.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you exit the menu, <h> and the AEB
range will be displayed on the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 The three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
 AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
 During AEB shooting, <A> in the viewfinder and <h> on the LCD panel will blink.
 If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three times
for each shot. When <i> or <M> is set and you hold down the shutter button
completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously and the camera
will automatically stop shooting. When <Q> or <k> is set, the three
bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
 You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
 If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
 AEB cannot be set for bulb exposures, or used with [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] or flash.
 AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
152
A AE LockN
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then
recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
backlit subjects.
1
Focus the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button. (0)
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button, the
current autoexposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.149)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.94)
Automatic Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
153
F: Bulb Exposures
When bulb is set, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, astronomical objects, and other subjects requiring
long exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
Take the picture.
3  The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
Elapsed exposure time
 Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.108).
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 When [z4: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [Auto] or [Enable],
noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced (p.128).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.167).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.167) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
154
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
You can shoot images preserving a wide tonal range where the
highlight and shadow detail would otherwise be lost. HDR shooting is
effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured for
each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR
image is recorded as a JPEG image.
HDR Shooting
1
Select [HDR Mode].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [HDR
Mode], then press <0>.
 The HDR mode screen will appear.
[Adjust dyn range].
2 Set
 Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
 Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
 The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
 To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
 Only the merged HDR image will be saved. The three images used to
produce the merged HDR image will not be saved.
 You cannot select RAW and RAW+JPEG. The HDR mode cannot be set
if RAW or RAW+JPEG is set.
 If you set AEB, white balance bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,
multiple shot exposures or if you shoot bulb exposures or a movie, HDR
mode cannot be set.
 Flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
155
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
3 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
 With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 2 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
4 Set
 For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable]. Then, press <0>.
the picture.
5 Take
 HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
 <w> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
156
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement will leave
afterimages.
 To prevent camera shake, the ISO speed may be set higher than usual.
 HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion. (HDR shooting is
possible within the range of ISO 100 - 25600.)
 When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.240) and Dust Delete data (p.281) will not
be appended to the image.
 If [Auto Image Align] is set to [Enable] and the HDR picture is shot
handheld, the edges of the photos will be cropped, lowering the
resolution slightly. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be minimal. In such a case, using a tripod is recommended.
 Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors or noise may appear.
 HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 Since HDR shooting merges the images, it will take a longer time to
record the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
 In HDR mode, the options grayed out in the camera menu cannot be set.
Note that when you set HDR mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer, highlight
tone priority, and exposure simulation will be set to [Disable] before
shooting.
157
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If
you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.179),
you can see how the single exposures merge while shooting.
1
Select [Multiple exposure].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Multiple
exposure], then press <0>.
 The multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
[Multiple exposure].
2 Set
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
 During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will
decrease greatly.
 If you set white balance bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, the HDR
mode or if you shoot a movie, multiple exposure shooting cannot be set.
 When Wi-Fi function is used, multiple exposure shooting cannot be set.
 During multiple-exposure shooting, Auto Lighting Optimizer, highlight
tone priority, peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration
correction will be disabled.
 The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
 If the Picture Style is [Auto], the [Standard] Picture Style will be set for
shooting.
158
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Multi-expos ctrl].
3 Set
 Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
 Additive
The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based
on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation.
Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure
compensation.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
If [Additive] is set, the image displayed during shooting may look noisy.
However, when you finish shooting the set number of exposures, noise
reduction will be applied and the final multiple-exposure image will look
less noisy.
 Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard
exposure. If you want to change the exposure of each single
exposure, select [Additive].
the [No. of exposures].
4 Set
 Press the <V> key to select the
number of exposures, then press
<0>.
 You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
159
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Continue Mult-exp].
5 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
 With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
6 Take
 The captured image will be displayed.
Remaining number of
exposures
 The <P> icon will blink.
 The number of remaining exposures
is displayed in brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
 Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.163).
7 Shoot subsequent exposures.
 Captured images will be displayed overlaid on previous images.
 With Live View shooting, the multiple-exposure images merged
so far will be displayed. By pressing the <B> button, you can
display only the Live View image.
 After you shoot the set number of exposures, multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled. With continuous shooting, after you
finish shooting the set number of exposures while holding down
the shutter button, the shooting will stop.
160
P Multiple ExposuresN
 Only the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved. The images
taken in steps 6 and 7 for the multiple-exposure image will not be saved.
 With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
 If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up for longer than
usual.)
 If you perform Live View shooting while [Additive] is set, the Live View
function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting
ends.
 In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
 If the power switch is set to <2> or the battery is replaced after you
set multiple exposure settings, multiple-exposure shooting will be
canceled.
 If you switch the shooting mode to a Basic Zone mode or <w/x> while
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
 When multiple exposure is set or while you shoot multiple exposures,
you cannot use the functions grayed out in the camera menu.
 If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure
shooting is not possible.
You can press the <x> button to view the multiple exposures taken so far
or delete the last single exposure (p.163).
161
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded in the Card
You can select an image recorded in the card as the first single
exposure. The original of the selected image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi.
expo.].
 Select [Select image for multi.
expo.], then press <0>.
 The images in the card will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
 Select [OK].
 The file No. of the selected image will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set
with [No. of exposures] will decrease
by 1. For example, if [No. of exposures]
is 3, you can shoot two exposures.
 Images shot with highlight tone priority set to [Enable] and images whose
aspect ratio is not 3:2 (p.188) cannot be selected as the first single exposure.
 Auto Lighting Optimizer, peripheral illumination correction and chromatic
aberration correction will be disabled, regardless of the settings of the
1 image selected as the first single exposure.
 The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space,
etc. set for the first 1 image will also be set for the subsequent images.
 If the first 1 image’s Picture Style is [Auto], the [Standard] Picture
Style will be set for the subsequent images.
 You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
162
P Multiple ExposuresN
 You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
 If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
Before you finish shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the merged
multiple-exposure image so far. You can
check how it looks and the exposure.
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
2 Return to previous screen
The operations will disappear and the screen
before you pressed the <L> button will
reappear.
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot
another image). The number of remaining
exposures will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
The images shot so far will be merged and
saved as a multiple-exposure image.
r Exit without saving
Multiple-exposure shooting will exit without
saving the images shot.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.
163
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
 Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.
Image-Recording Quality Setting
Merged Multiple-Exposure
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
 Can I merge images recorded in the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.162). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
 Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
Shooting multiple exposures is also possible with Live View shooting
(p.179). Note that [A1: Aspect ratio] will be fixed at [3:2].
 Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure
shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is not set to [Disable], the power
will turn off automatically after 30 min. of non-operation. If the auto
power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will end, and
multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure
settings will be canceled.
164
2 Mirror LockupN
Although using the self-timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups
(macro photography).
1 Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Mirror lockup], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
2Focus the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.
 The mirror will swing up.
3 Press the shutter button completely again.
 The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
 In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
 Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and
damage the shutter curtains.
 If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror lockup,
keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay time + bulb
exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer
countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations,
etc. are disabled.
 Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can
be taken.
 You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.
 If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
 For mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.167).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.167). Setting the
remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
165
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.27)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece
cover is unnecessary.
1
Detach the eyecup.
 Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After taking the picture, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down into the
eyepiece groove.
166
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3, Timer Remote
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately), or any EOS accessory
equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for shooting (p.354).
To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.
1
Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
 Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
 To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or
use a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
1 Focus the subject.
the lens focus mode switch to
2 Set
<MF>.
 You can also shoot with <f>.
167
R Remote Control Shooting
3 Press the <R> button. (9)
the self-timer.
4 Select
 Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<6> dial to select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller’s
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
 Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor and
press the transmit button.
 The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering
the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from such light
sources.
Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function.
168
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with an EOSdedicated, EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) or nonCanon flash unit and how to set flash functions on the
camera’s menu screen.
169
D Flash Photography
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
An EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography as
easy as normal shooting.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
menu, see pages 172-177.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
 FE lock
This enables you to attain a proper flash exposure for a specific part
of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, then press
the camera’s <A> button and take the picture.
 Flash exposure compensation
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, flash exposure
compensation can be set. You can set flash exposure compensation
up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Set it with the Quick Control screen (p.49) or [z2: External
Speedlite control]’s [Flash function settings]. When you press the
shutter button halfway, the <y> icon will appear in the viewfinder.
If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is not set to [Disable], the image
may still look bright even if a darker flash exposure compensation amount
has been set.
When it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite may automatically emit the AF-assist beam.
170
D Flash Photography
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/180 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec., since the flash duration of such
units is longer than that of compact flash units and vary depending on
the models.
Cautions for Live View shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [A2:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.190). The flash will not fire if it is set to
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
171
3 Setting the FlashN
With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions
and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn
on the Speedlite before starting these settings.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
1
Select [External Speedlite
control].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [External
Speedlite control], then press <0>.
 The external Speedlite control screen
will appear.
the desired option.
2 Select
 Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Flash exposure
compensation may be necessary. This
setting is for advanced users.
172
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.

: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.

: 1/180-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.

: 1/180 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/180 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/180-1/60 sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject background will come out
darker than with [1/180-1/60 sec. auto].
If [1/180-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/180 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is
not possible in the <f> mode.
173
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Function Settings
On the screen, the settable functions and the display will differ
depending on the Speedlite, current flash mode, flash Custom
Function settings, etc.
For details on your Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
 Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
The [Manual flash] mode is for setting
the Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
For other flash modes, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
174
3 Setting the FlashN
 Wireless functions
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission. For details on wireless
flash, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
 Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at
night. With Second-curtain synchronization, two flashes will be fired:
Once when you press the shutter button completely, and once
immediately before the exposure ends.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash
when you want to give priority to the aperture setting.
175
3 Setting the FlashN
 Flash exposure compensation
The same setting as “Flash exposure
compensation” on page 170 can be set.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Flash exposure bracketing
While the flash output is changed
automatically, three shots are taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with
flash exposure bracketing.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be used automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation on the camera (with the flash function
settings). If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s
setting overrides the camera’s.
176
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
 Select [Flash C.Fn settings], then
press <0>.
the functions.
2 Set
 Press the <U> key to select the
number, then press <0>.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
Clear Settings
1
Select [Clear settings].
 Under the [z2: External Speedlite
control] tab, select [Clear settings],
then press <0>.
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select either [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
 When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings will be cleared.
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always fire at full
output.
The Speedlite’s Personal Functions (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with
the camera’s [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
177
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
picture on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
Live View shooting is effective for photos of still subjects.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
About Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.390) installed on your
computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot
remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
179
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Live View image will closely
reflect the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
the subject.
3 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.192).
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 After the image review ends, the camera will
return to Live View shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording
quality set to JPEG 73).
 In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
 During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.167) for Live View shooting.
180
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [A1: Live View shoot.] to
[Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
( 23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
220 approx. shots
190 approx. shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 1 hr. 45 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 201-202.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically as set with [52: Auto power off] (p.55). If [52: Auto
power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end automatically
after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the stereo AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you
can display the Live View image on a TV (p.261, 264).
181
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
About the Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
AF method
• d : FlexiZone - Single
• c : Face detection Live
mode
• f: Quick mode
Possible shots
Maximum burst/Multiple exposures remaining
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram
Shooting mode
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Drive mode
Metering mode
Image-recording
quality
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures
GPS acquisition
status
Wi-Fi function
AE lock
Flash-ready
Shutter speed
Flash exposure compensation
Aperture
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Exposure level indicator
Exposure
simulation
AEB
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wi-Fi transmission status
 The histogram can be displayed when [A1: Expo. simulation: Enable]
(p.189) is set.
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.60). Note
that if the AF method is set to [u Live mode] or the camera is connected to a
TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot be displayed.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being
displayed at the suitable brightness due to low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.
 If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be
grayed out (for your reference). The histogram may not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
182
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
During Live View shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-portrait
Nature and
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue sky
included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u Live mode]. If another AF method
is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube
or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a
night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
<→ Continued on next page>
183
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
• EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4 and *5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 apply, the shutter speed will become slow.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white
balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see what the captured
image will look like.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.











White balance
White balance correction
Ambience-based shots
Light/scene-based shots
Metering mode
Exposure (with [A1: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)
184
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
If you press the <Q> button while the Live View image is displayed in a
Creative Zone mode, you can set any of the following: AF method,
drive mode, metering mode, image-recording quality, white balance,
Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions in bold and the settings
shown in the table on page 83.
1
Press the <Q> button.
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <V> key to select a
function.
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.63) will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
 In the <8> mode, select the
shooting mode box, then press <0>
to select the shooting mode.
 To set the RAW image-recording
quality or Picture Style parameters,
press the <B> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
185
Shooting Function Settings
f / R / i / q / S Settings
While the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>,
<R>, <i>, or <q> button, the setting screen will appear on the
LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
When Quick mode is set, you can press the <S> button to select the
AF point. The operation procedure is the same as with viewfinder
shooting.
 When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering
circle will be displayed in the center.
 During Live View shooting, the exposure is set at the moment the picture
is taken, regardless of the metering mode.
186
3 Menu Function Settings
[A1] Menu
Function settings particular to Live View
shooting are explained here. Details of
menu items under the [A1] and [A2]
tabs are on pages 187-191. In Basic
Zone modes, certain items under the
[A1] tab will not appear and the [A2]
tab will not appear.
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. These functions do not take effect during viewfinder
shooting.
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [FlexiZoneAF (Single)] (p.192), [u Live mode]
(p.193), or [Quick mode] (p.197).
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines. It can help
you level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag
n], the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
align the intersections over the subject for better balance in the
composition.
187
3 Menu Function Settings
 Aspect ratioM
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since the aspect
ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image can be
generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW
image with the camera and the provided software.
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
5472x3648
4864x3648
5472x3072*
3648x3648
3/1
(20.0 megapixels) (17.7 megapixels) (16.8 megapixels) (13.3 megapixels)
4104x2736
3648x2736
4104x2310*
2736x2736
41
(11.0 megapixels) (10.0 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels)
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
4
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
a/61
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
b
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
c
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels)
(290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
Image
Quality
 The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the
respective aspect ratio exactly.
 The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger
than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor
when shooting.
 If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
188
3 Menu Function Settings
 Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of
the actual image (exposure) will look.
・ Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
・ During e
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see. The image will be
displayed close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting
image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
・ Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
image is displayed at the standard brightness.
 If you set an expanded ISO speed setting as [Maximum] in [ISO speed
range], Live View shooting will be possible under darker conditions.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
189
3 Menu Function Settings
[A2] Menu
 Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
The shooting operation noise is quieter than with normal shooting.
Continuous shooting is also possible. If <i> is set, you can shoot
at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 4.1 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in
below) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you
use an Extension tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.
 If you use flash, silent shooting will not be possible regardless of the
[Silent LV shoot.] setting.
 When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If [Mode 2] is set and you use remote control shooting (p.167), the
operation will be the same as with [Mode 1].
With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
190
3 Menu Function Settings
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
The Live View shooting will stop with any of the following operations. To
resume Live View shooting, press the <0> button again.
• When [z4: Dust Delete Data], [54: Sensor cleaning], [54:Clear all
camera settings], or [54: z Firmware ver.] was selected
• When the shooting mode was changed (example: Basic Zone modes ↔
Creative Zone modes)
191
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
The AF methods available are [FlexiZoneAF (Single)], [u Live
mode] (face detection, p.193), and [Quick mode] (p.197).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.199).
Select the AF method.
 Under the [A1] tab, select [AF
method].
 While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
<f> button to select the AF method
on the setting screen.
FlexiZone - Single: d
The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the
Live View image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than
with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than
with the Quick mode.
1
AF point
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
the AF point.
2 Move
 You can use <9> to move the AF
point to where you want to focus. (It
cannot go to the edges of the picture.)
 To return the AF point to the center,
press the <0> or <L> button.
192
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.180).
u (Face detection) Live mode: c
This is the same AF method as with FlexiZone - Single. It detects the
human face and focuses. Have the target person face the camera.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
the <q> frame over the target face.
193
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
2 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway and
the camera will focus the face
covered by the <p> frame.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
 If a face cannot be detected, the AF
point < > will be displayed and AF
will be executed at the center.
the picture.
3 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.180).
 If the focus is far off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens
enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to
<AF>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be
detected and <p> will be displayed.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture,
too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only part of the face.
 You can press the <0> or <L> button to switch to FlexiZone - Single
(p.192), and use <9> to move the AF point. To return to u (Face
detection) Live mode, press <0> or the <L> button again.
 Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button
halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.
194
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single and u (Face Detection) Live Mode Notes
AF Operation
 Focusing will take slightly longer.
 Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button
halfway will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source.
 If you press the <u> button in the FlexiZone - Single, the image will
be magnified at the AF point. If focusing is difficult in the magnified
view, return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF
speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.
 If you magnify the view after focusing with FlexiZone - Single in the
normal view, it may not look focused.
 In the u Live mode, pressing the <u> button will not magnify the
image.
 In the FlexiZone - Single or u (face detection) Live mode, if you shoot a
peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the center AF point
over the subject to focus, then take the picture.
 The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an
EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,
the LED light will turn on automatically for AF-assist when necessary in
the FlexiZone - Single and u (face detection) Live mode.
195
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult
 Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat
surfaces.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or points of light.
 Under fluorescent or LED light sources and when the image flickers.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Subjects strongly reflecting light.
 The AF point covers both near and faraway subjects (such as an
animal in a cage).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
 Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
If you use AF with any of the following lenses, using [Quick mode] is
recommended. If you use the [FlexiZoneAF (Single)] or [u Live mode]
for AF, it may take a longer time to achieve focus or the camera may not be
able to achieve correct focus.
EF28mm f/2.8, EF35mm f/2, EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f/1.8 II,
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro, EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus),
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to your local Canon website.
196
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Quick Mode: f
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode (p.92),
using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.
You can use eleven AF points to focus (automatically selected). You
can also select one AF point to focus and focus only the area covered
by that AF point (manually selected). In Basic Zone modes, the AF point
will be selected automatically. You cannot select the AF point.
AF point
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The small boxes are the AF points.
the AF point.N
2 Select
 Press the <S> button.
 You can either use <9> or turn the
<6> or <5> dial to select an AF
point.
 Press <0> to toggle between the
center AF point and automatic
selection.
197
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 The Live View image will turn off, the
reflex mirror will go back down, and
AF will be executed. (No picture is
taken.)
 When focus is achieved, the beeper
will sound and the Live View image
will reappear.
 The AF point used to focus will light
up in green.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will blink in orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.180).
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the
Live View image is displayed.
198
Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
 Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Press <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus.
 To return the magnifying frame to the
center, press <0> or the <L>
button.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change as follows:
AE lock
Magnified area position
5x
10x
Normal
view
1x
Magnification
199
Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.180).
200
Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period, the camera’s
internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate. Stop
Live View shooting when not shooting images.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Stop Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should stop Live View shooting and allow the camera’s
internal temperature to cool before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Stop the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the image quality of high ISO
speed images or long exposures may deteriorate even before the white
<s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Result
 If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In
magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be
captured in the normal view range.
 If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.125) is not set to [Disable], the
image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or
decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
201
Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting
under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera to a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area might
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
 For Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.303).
Lens and Flash
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
marketed since the second half of 2011.
 FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
202
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
The movie recording format will
be MOV.
 For cards which can record movies, see page 3.
Under the [53] tab, if you set [Wi-Fi] to [Enable], you cannot shoot
movies. Before shooting movies, set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable].
203
k Shooting Movies
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to other than <a>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1
Set the shooting mode.
 Set the Mode Dial to any shooting
mode except <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.192-200).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the <0> button to start
shooting a movie.
 While the movie is being shot, the
Recording movie
Microphone
204
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
 Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 233 and 234.
 If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
201 and 202.
 In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as in the
<A> mode. Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left (p.207).
 In the <s>, <f>, or <F> shooting modes, the settings will be the
same as in the <d> mode.
 Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and
Creative Zone modes (p.353).
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.
In the Auto Lighting Optimizer’s menu, setting [
Disabled in M
or B modes] is possible. However, during movie shooting, even if the
shooting mode is set to <F>, autoexposure shooting will take effect
instead of Bulb exposure. Therefore, the Auto Lighting Optimizer setting
is possible.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.153) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting display time is set by
[Z1: Metering timer]. After applying AE lock during movie shooting,
you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting is
retained until you press the <S> button.)
 In Creative Zone modes, you can enable exposure compensation by
sliding the <R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, and ISO
speed on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a
still photo (p.210). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not
displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ
from that for still photo shooting.
 If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture
will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).
205
k Shooting Movies
ISO speed in Basic Zone modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - 12800.
ISO speed in Creative Zone modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - 12800.
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO speed range]’s
[Maximum] setting to [25600/H] (p.109), the maximum ISO speed
for the automatic ISO speed setting will be expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600). Be aware that when you set [Maximum]
to [25600], the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and
remains ISO 12800.
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.130), the ISO
speed will be ISO 200 - 12800.
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.110, 111) for movie shooting.
For [ISO speed range], if [Minimum] is set to [L (50)] and [Maximum] to
[H1 (51200)] or [H2 (102400)], and you switch from still photo shooting to
movie shooting, the minimum setting for the automatic ISO range will be
ISO 100 and the maximum will be H (equivalent to ISO 25600). The ISO
speed cannot be expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200/102400.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
With autoexposure (mode other than a) movie shooting, the camera
will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light
conditions. For details, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
206
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Background
Non-portrait
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue sky included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u Live mode]. If another AF method
is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension Tube
or Closeup Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
207
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the <i> button.
 The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
 Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and aperture.
4 Set
 Press the shutter button halfway and
Shutter speed
Aperture
check the exposure level indicator.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter speeds
depend on the frame rate <9>.
• 6 5 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
•8 7
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.204).
208
k Shooting Movies
ISO speed during manual-exposure shooting
 With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - 12800. Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO
speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [25600/H], the maximum ISO
speed will be expanded and the ISO speed will be set automatically
within ISO 100 to H.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - 12800 in 1/3-stop
increments. Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [25600/H], the maximum ISO speed for
manual ISO speed setting will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO
25600). Be aware that when you set [Maximum] to [25600], the
maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 12800.
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.130), you can
set the ISO speed within ISO 200 - 12800 (depending on the [ISO
speed range] setting).
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.110, 111) for movie shooting.
 Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000/20000/25600 may result in much
noise, it is designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as [H]).
 If [Minimum] is set to [L (50)] and [Maximum] to [H1 (51200)] or [H2
(102400)] in [ISO speed range], and you switch from still photo shooting
to movie shooting, the minimum setting for manual ISO range will be ISO
100 and the maximum will be H (ISO 25600). The ISO speed cannot be
expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200/102400.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.22, 210)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
209
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
AF method
•d : FlexiZone - Single
•c : Face detection
Live mode
•f: Quick mode
Movie shooting mode
: Autoexposure
(Basic Zone
modes)
: Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
: Manual exposure
Drive mode
Image-recording
quality
Possible shots
Maximum burst
Movie shooting remaining time*/
Elapsed time
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Movie recording
size
Compression
method
Recording level: Manual
Frame rate
AE lock
Shutter speed
Level meter
Aperture
GPS acquisition status
Recording movie
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Video
snapshot
Exposure mode
L:
Autoexposure
K:
Manual exposure
Attenuator
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter
Wi-Fi function
Exposure level indicator
* Applies to a single movie clip.
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.60).
 Note that if the AF method is set to [u Live mode] or the camera is
connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.261), the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
210
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
 The camera cannot autofocus continuously like a camcorder.
 Autofocusing during movie shooting is not recommended since it may
momentarily throw the focus far off or change the exposure.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended where you will perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.
 Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 233 and 234.
 If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
201 and 202.
 Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.223).
 A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB.
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [A]).
 You can also focus the image by pressing the <p> button.
 To focus during movie shooting, press the <p> button. You cannot
focus by pressing the shutter button.
 Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.204).
 Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.20) as the external microphone is given the
priority.
211
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
 You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.167) to start
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>. Set
the shooting timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo
shooting will take effect.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 35 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
and approx. 1 hr. 25 min. at low temperature (0°C/32°F).
 When using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the power focus
mode marketed since the second half of 2011, power focusing is
possible during movie shooting.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the
effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically reflect
the effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.








White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
212
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos during Movie Shooting
 If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
 The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
 The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the
card.
 Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
Function
Settings
As set in [z1: Image quality].
Image-Recording When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or
Quality
[1280x720], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is
[640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.
ISO Speed*
With autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - 12800.
With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO speed during
manual-exposure shooting” on page 209.
With autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter
speed and aperture.
Exposure Setting
With manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed
and aperture.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
213
k Shooting Movies
 AEB cannot be used.
 Even if an external Speedlite is used, it will not fire.
 Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.
However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.
Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots
during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may
stop automatically.
 If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting,
using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller imagerecording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still
photos are also recommended.
 You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.
 The self-timer can be used before you start shooting a movie. If used
during movie shooting, the self-timer will switch to single-image shooting.
214
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the following: AF method, drive
mode, image-recording quality, movie-recording size, soundrecording level (with [Sound recording: Manual] set), white balance,
Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and video snapshot.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.
1 Press the <Q> button.
 The settable functions will be displayed.
2Select a function and set it.
Press the <V> key to select a function.
 The selected function and Feature guide (p.63) will appear.
Set it by pressing the <U> key.
To set the RAW image-recording quality or Picture Style
parameters, press the <B> button.
3 Exit the setting.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and return to movie shooting.
f / R / i / S Settings
While the movie image is displayed on the LCD monitor, if you press the
<f> or <R> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD
monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective
shooting function.
When Quick mode is set, you can press the <S> button to select the
AF point. The procedure is the same as with viewfinder shooting.
During manual-exposure shooting (p.208), you can press the <i>
button to set the ISO speed.
215
3 Setting the Movie-Recording Size
With [Z2: Movie rec. size], you can
set the movie’s image size, frame rate
per second, and compression method.
The frame rate switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting.
 Image size
A [1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 16:9.
B [1280x720]
: High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The
aspect ratio will be 16:9.
C [640x480]
: Standard-definition recording quality. The
aspect ratio will be 4:3.
 Frame rate (fps: frames per second)
6/8 : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5/7 : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,
China, Australia, etc.).
4
: Mainly for motion pictures.
 Compression method
X IPB
: Compresses multiple frames at a time
efficiently for recording. Since the file size will
be smaller than with ALL-I, you can shoot
longer.
W ALL-I (I-only) : Compresses one frame at a time for recording.
Although the file size will be bigger than with
IPB, the movie will be more suited for editing.
216
3 Setting the Movie-Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
MovieRecording Size
Total Recording Time (approx.)
4 GB Card
8 GB Card
16 GB Card
File Size
(approx.)
16 min.
32 min.
1 hr. 4 min.
235 MB/min.
11 min.
22 min.
65
4
X
65
4
W
5 min.
87
B
87
C 65
X
W
X
18 min.
6 min.
48 min.
A
37 min.
1 hr. 14 min.
12 min.
25 min.
1 hr. 37 min. 3 hr. 14 min.
685 MB/min.
205 MB/min.
610 MB/min.
78 MB/min.
 About Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed
in the movie-shooting image will start blinking. If you keep shooting
until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be
created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code
will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively automatically.
After the movie playback ends, select the next movie to be played.
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above (p.233).
About Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-Definition
featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning lines).
217
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in monaural
microphone or the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately).
You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level.
Set the sound recording with [Z2:
Sound recording].
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
[Auto]
[Manual]
[Disable]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
: For advanced users. You can adjust the sound recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
turning the <5> dial to adjust the sound recording level.
While looking at the peak hold indicator, adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on
the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
: Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter/Attenuator
[Wind filter] : When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise
recorded outdoors. This feature takes effect only with
the built-in microphone.
Note that [Enable] will also reduce low bass sounds, so
set this function to [Disable] when there is no wind. It
will record a more natural sound than with [Enable].
[Attenuator] : Even if [Sound recording] is set to [Auto] or [Manual]
before shooting, sound distortion may still result if there
is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to
[Enable] is recommended.
218
3 Setting the Sound Recording
 Using the microphone
The built-in microphone records monaural sound. Stereo sound
recording is also possible by connecting the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.20) as the external microphone is given
the priority.
 In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On/Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]) and the wind filter function will take
effect.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
219
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the video and audio during movie
shooting. It is recorded at all times in the
following units: hours, minutes, seconds,
and frames. It is mainly used during
movie editing.
Set the time code with [Z2: Time
code].
Count Up
[Rec run]
[Free run]
: The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie.
: The time code counts up whether you are shooting or
not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s start time.
[Manual input setting] : You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
[Reset]
: The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to 00:00:00:00.
[Set to camera time] : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match
the camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be
set to 00.
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie-shooting screen.
[Rec time] : Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
[Time code] : Indicates the time code during movie shooting.
220
3 Setting the Time Code
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code.
 If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.36), the time code will be affected.
 The time code is not recorded for video snapshots.
Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always be
recorded to the movie file.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
[Rec time] : Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
[Time code] : Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
 If you change the setting for either [Movie play count] in [Z2: Time
code] or for [x3: Movie play count], the other setting will also change
automatically.
 “Frames” are not displayed during movie shooting and movie playback.
221
3 Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time
code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and
time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This
correction function is called drop frame.
[Enable]
: The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping
time code numbers.
[Disable]
: The discrepancy is not corrected.
If the frame rate is 4 (23.976 fps) or if the [Video system] is [PAL] (with
7/5 set), the drop frame will not work ([Drop frame] will not be
displayed).
222
3 Menu Function Settings
[Z1] Menu
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
[Z1] and [Z2] tabs dedicated to
movie shooting will be displayed. The
menu options are as follows.
 AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 192-198. You
can select [FlexiZoneAF (Single)], [u Live mode], or [Quick
mode]. Note that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not
possible.
Even if the AF method is set to [Quick mode], it will switch to
[FlexiZoneAF (Single)] during movie shooting.
 Silent LV shootingN
This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page
190.
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
223
3 Menu Function Settings
[Z2] Menu
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the
intersections over the subject for better balance in the composition.
 Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
compression method). For details, see page 216.
 Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 218.
 Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see page 220.
 Video snapshot
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 225.
224
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function.
A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8
sec. A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album
and can be saved to the card as a single movie file. By changing the
scene or angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short
movies.
A video snapshot album can also be played together with background
music (p.230, 254).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot x
Video snapshot album
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
1
Select [Video snapshot].
 Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video
snapshot], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
225
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Album settings].
3 Select
 Select [Album settings], then press
<0>.
 If you want to continue shooting for
an existing album, go to “Adding to
Existing Album” (p.229).
[Create a new album].
4 Select
 Select [Create a new album], then
press <0>.
the snapshot length.
5 Select
 Press <0>, press the <V> key to
select the snapshot’s length, then
press <0>.
[OK].
6 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
Shooting duration
226
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the movie
shooting screen. A blue bar will
appear to indicate the snapshot
length.
 Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.227).
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
7 Shoot
 Press the <0> button, then shoot.
 The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
 After the LCD monitor turns off and the
access lamp stops blinking, the
confirmation screen will appear (p.228).
as a video snapshot album.
8 Save
 Press the <U> key to select [J
Save as album], then press <0>.
 The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
to shoot more video
9 Continue
snapshots.
 Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
 Press the <U> key to select [J
Add to album], then press <0>.
 To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album], then select [OK].
the video snapshot shooting.
10 Exit
 Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the normal movie
shooting screen.
227
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 8 and 9
Function
Description
J Save as album (Step 8)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
J Add to album (Step 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be added
to the album recorded immediately before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 9)
A new video snapshot album is created and the
movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot.
The new album will be a different file from the
previously recorded album.
1 Playback video
The video snapshot just recorded will be played.
snapshot (Steps 8 and 9) For playback operations, see the table below.
r Do not save to album
If you want to delete the video snapshot you just
(Step 8)
recorded and not save it to the album, select
r Delete without saving to [OK].
album (Step 9)
[Playback video snapshot] Operations
Function
Playback Description
7 Play
By pressing <0>, you can play or pause the just-recorded
video snapshot.
5 First frame
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
Skip backward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.
time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed.
3 Previous frame Each
If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Skip forward*
4 Last frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Play back position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.253) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous screen.
* With [Skip backward/Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond to the
number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec.).
228
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Adding to Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
 Follow step 4 on page 226 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
an existing album.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
existing album, then press <0>.
 After confirming the dialog displayed,
select [OK] on the screen, then press
<0>.
 Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the movie
shooting screen.
the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
 Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.227).
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
229
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
 You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
 Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.216).
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto/Manual] to [Disable] or
from [Disable] to [Auto/Manual] (p.218).
• Updating the firmware.
 You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.
 The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
Playing an Album
You can play a completed album in the same way as a normal movie
(p.253).
1
Play back the movie.
 Press the <x> button to display
images.
the album.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an album.
 On the single-image display, the
[
] icon displayed on the upper
left indicates that the image is a video
snapshot.
back the album.
3 Play
 Press <0>.
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
230
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Background Music
 Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
 You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.254, 257). To play background
music, you must first copy the background music to the card using EOS
Utility (provided software). For information on how to copy the background
music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in the album.
1
On the playback panel, select [X]
(Edit).
 The editing screen will be displayed.
an editing operation.
2 Select
 Use the <U> keys to select an
editing operation, then press <0>.
Function
Description
Move snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to move, then press <0>. Press the <U> key to
move the snapshot, then press <0>.
Delete snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you want
to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will be displayed
on the selected video snapshot. Pressing <0> again will
cancel the selection and [L] will disappear.
Play snapshot
Press the <U> key to select the video snapshot you
want to play, then press <0>.
231
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
the edited album.
3 Save
 Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
 Press the <U> key to select [W]
(Save), then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
Provided Software Usable with Albums
 EOS Video Snapshot Task: Editing albums is possible. This is an addon function for ImageBrowser EX.
232
Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E>
icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should stop still shooting and allow the camera’s internal
temperature to cool before shooting again. Since the movie’s image
quality will hardly deteriorate, movie shooting will continue.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the movie shooting will soon be
terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot
again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the
power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set
the IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up the operation sound
and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Use the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce these
sounds in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part
may look momentarily still when you play back the movie. In such cases,
shoot movies with manual exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area might
appear black on the LCD monitor. The will be recorded in almost the
same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
233
Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
Indicator
will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting
 Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
201.
Playback and TV connection
 If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.261, 264) and shoot a movie,
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.
Lens
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting only when using
a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed
since the second half of 2011.
234
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back and erase
photos and movies, how to display them on a TV
screen, and other playback-related functions.
About images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or had their file
names changed.
235
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last captured image or last image
viewed will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image, turn the <5> dial
counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the display format will change.
No information
Histogram
236
With basic information
Shooting information display
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
3 Grid Display
On the single-image display, you can
overlay a playback grid.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt, as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
237
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode
AF Microadjustment
Protect images
Exposure compensation
amount
Rating
Flash exposure
compensation amount
Aperture
Folder number File number
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)
Shutter speed
Picture Style/
Settings
Metering mode
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Image-recording
quality
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Color temperature
when <P> is set
Color space
Shooting date and
time
White balance correction
File size
Eye-Fi transfer
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
taken in the HDR mode.
* <P> will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* For JPEG images developed with the camera’s RAW processing function or
resized, and then saved, <u> will be displayed.
238
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode
Ambience and
ambience effects
Shooting mode
Lighting or scene
* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ
depending on the shooting mode.
* Photos taken in the <C> mode will show [Background blur].
Sample Movie
Shooting time, Playback time/
Time code
Playback
Shutter speed
Aperture
Shooting mode
Movie recording
size
Frame rate
Movie file size
Compression method
* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
(when set manually) will be displayed.
* The < > icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
239
B: Shooting Information Display
 About the Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed
highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a negative
amount and shoot again.
 About the AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection was used, multiple AF points may be displayed in red.
 About the Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
(darker on the left and brighter on the right),
while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter the image. If there are too
many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be
lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the
highlight detail will be lost. The gradation inbetween will be reproduced. By checking the
image and its brightness histogram, you can
see the exposure level inclination and the
overall gradation.
240
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
B: Shooting Information Display
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the
color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and
denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation.
By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s
saturation and gradation condition, as well as white balance
inclination.
241
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine
images on one screen.
1
Press the <u> button.
 Press the <u> button during image
playback.
 [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
 Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
 The 4-image index display will appear. The
selected image is highlighted in a orange frame.
 If you turn the <6> dial further to the left,
the 9-image index display will appear. If you
turn the <6> dial to the right, the index
display will change as follows: 9-image, 4image, and single-image display.


an image or movie.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to move the orange
frame and select the image. You can also
select it with the <V> or <U> key.
 Press the <u> button to turn off the
[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial
to go to the next or preceding screen.
 Press <0> in the index display, and the selected
image will be displayed as a single image.
242
x Searching for Images Quickly
I Jump through Images (Jump Display)
With the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the jump
method, then press <0>.
d:
e:
f:
g:
h:
i:
j:
k:
Display images one by one
Jump 10 images
Jump 100 images
Display by date
Display by folder
Display movies only
Display stills only
Display by image rating (p.247)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 On the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
Jump method
Playback position
 To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images according to folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only either ones.
 If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
243
u Magnified View
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.
1
Magnified area position
Magnify the image.
 The image can be magnified during
image playback (single-image display),
during image review after image
capture, and from shooting-ready state.
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the screen.
 The image magnification increases as you
turn the <6> dial clockwise. You can
magnify the image up to approx. 10x.
 The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. Turning the dial further
will display the index display (p.242).
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
 To exit the magnified display, press
the <u> button or <x> button and
the single-image display will
reappear.
 In magnified view, you can turn the <5> dial to view another image at
the same magnification.
 The image cannot be displayed in the index display during the image
review immediately after shooting.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
244
u Magnified View
3 Magnification Settings
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
starting magnification and initial position
for the magnified view.
 1x (no magnification)
The image will not be magnified. The magnified view will start with
the single-image display.
 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view will start at the image center at the selected
magnification.
 Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo was taken with manual focus, the magnified view will start at
the image center.
 Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts from the image center.
With images taken with [FlexiZoneAF (Single)] or [u Live mode] (p.192),
the magnified view starts from the image center even when [1x] is set.
245
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image on the
index display (p.242).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90°  270°  0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
 If you have set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.270) before taking
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
246
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: l/m/
n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image or movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image or movie to be rated.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image or movie from a
three-image display. To return to the
single-image display, turn the <6>
dial clockwise.
the image or movie.
3 Rate
 Press the <V> key to select a
rating.
 The total number of images and
movies rated will be counted for each
rating.
 To rate another image or movie,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
 To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
247
3 Setting Ratings
The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is 999.
If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed
for that rating.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images and
movies with a specific rating.
 With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images and movies with
a specific rating.
 With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.390), you can
select only images and movies with a specific rating (still photos only).
 With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, etc., you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (JPEG images only).
248
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set any of the
following: [J: Protect images, b: Rotate image, 9: Rating, R:
RAW image processing (RAW images only), S: Resize (JPEG image
only), : Highlight alert, : AF point display, e: Image jump w/
6, k: Wi-Fi*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if the [53] tab’s [Wi-Fi] is set to [Disable].
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <V> key to select a
function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
 When setting RAW processing,
Resize, or Wi-Fi, also press <0> to
finalize the setting. For details, see
page 272 for RAW image processing
and page 277 for Resize. To cancel,
press the <M> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
249
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the functions you can select may
be limited.
250
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV set
(p.261, 264)
Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to
connect the camera to a TV set. Then
you can play back captured movies and
still photos on the TV.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and HighDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image quality.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a cable, you
cannot play or save movies and images.
 If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the movie cannot
be played.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.253-260)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS
Video Snapshot Task (p.232) can be played on the camera.
251
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
(p.391)
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
with ImageBrowser EX (provided
software).
 To have the movie play back smoothly on a computer, use a highperformance computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements
for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User
Guide.
 If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit
the movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
252
k Playing Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to display
images.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played.
 On the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the upper left
indicates a movie. If the movie is a video
snapshot, <
> will be displayed.
 You can press the <B> button to
switch to the shooting information
display (p.238).
 In the index display, perforations at the
left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
on the index display, press <0> to
switch to the single-image display.
display, press <0>.
3 IntheThesingle-image
movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
Play back the movie.
4  Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
 The movie will start playing.
 You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
 You can adjust the sound volume by
turning the <6> dial even during
movie playback.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
The camera might not be able to play movies shot by another camera.
253
k Playing Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <U> key.
The slow-motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the
screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous
frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed.
If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
Background
music*
Play back a movie with the selected background music
(p.260).
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.255).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play count:
Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss:ff
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [Movie play
count: Time code] set)
9 Volume
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.253) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the single-image
display.
* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be as follows: approx. 4 hr. 15 min.
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play a movie (p.261, 264),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.)
 If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
254
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Press <U> (fast forward) or turn
the <5> dial (frame-by-frame) to
specify the position where you want
to delete the scene. On the bar at the
top of the screen, you can see which
part (indicated in orange) and how
much will be deleted.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>.
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing, go back to step 2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, select [OK] on the
confirmation screen.
255
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.
 On the confirmation screen, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ]), the actual position where the movie is edited may
differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, editing the movie is not possible. Use a
fully-charged battery.
256
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be played
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played.
2 Select
 Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
[All images/Movies/Stills]
 Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [jAll images/
kMovies/zStills]. Then press
<0>.
[Date/Folder/Rating]
 Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [iDate/nFolder/
9Rating].
 When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
 Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
[Date]
[Folder]
[Rating]
257
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting
date will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be
played back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating
will be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 Set
 Press the <V> key to select [Set
up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
 The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 260.
 After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
[Display time]
258
[Repeat]
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
the slide show.
4 Start
 Press the <V> key to select [Start],
then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the
<M> button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
 During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.236).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not work.
 The display time may vary depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 261.
259
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Selecting the Background Music
1
Select [Background music].
 Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
the background music.
2 Select
 Press the <V> key to select the
desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
the background music.
3 Play
 To listen to a sample of the
background music, press the
<B> button.
 Press the <V> key to play another
background music track. To stop
listening to the background music,
press the <B> button again.
 Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
 To delete a background music track,
press the <V> key and select the
track, then press the <L> button.
At the time of purchase, you cannot select background music with the
camera. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the
background music to the card. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
260
Viewing the Images on TV
You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set.
 Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume
cannot be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets
(Connected with HDMI)
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s
HDMI IN port.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
261
Viewing the Images on TV
the <x> button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV’s optimum
resolution.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 253.
The images cannot be output at the same time from both the <D>
and <q> terminals.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images. In such a
case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
262
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Viewing the Images on TV
the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV.
 The TV’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera.
the camera’s <x> button.
3 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV’s
remote control to play back images.
an image.
4 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Disp. shooting info
: Rotate
the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
 Press the / button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
button. For a slide show, press the
remote control’s / button to select an
option, then press the Enter button.
 If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
 Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
263
Viewing the Images on TV
Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)
1
Connect the provided AV cable to
the camera.
 With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing
the back of the camera, insert it into
the <q> terminal.
the AV cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
(Red)
(White)
AUDIO
(Yellow)
VIDEO
 Connect the AV cable to the TV’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminal.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 To play back movies, see page 253.
 Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images may not
be displayed if you use a different cable.
 If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not
be displayed properly. If this happens, switch to the proper video system
format with [53: Video system].
264
K Protecting Images
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
 The images will be displayed.
Image protect icon
the image.
3 Protect
 Turn the <5> dial to select the




image to be protected, then press
<0>.
The image will be protected, and the
<K> icon will appear at the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step 3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
265
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [x1:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.53), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.268), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
266
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in
one batch. Protected images (p.265) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent
important images from being erased accidentally, protect
them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW
and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear at the
bottom of the screen.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at one time.
1
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
267
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
 A checkmark <X> will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
 To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The selected images will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.53).
268
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
read.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
the brightness.
2 Adjust
 While referring to the gray chart,
press the <U> key, then press
<0>.
To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is recommended
(p.240).
269
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the auto rotation.
2 Set
 Select the desired option, then press
<0>.
 OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
 Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
 Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be
automatically rotated for the image review.
 If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
 If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the provided software is recommended.
270
10
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images with the camera or
resize (shrink) JPEG images.
 The M mark shown on the right of the page title indicates
that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(d/s/f/a/F).
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter is not
possible if the camera is set for multiple exposures, or while it
is connected to a computer via the <C> terminal.
271
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. While the RAW image itself does not change, you can process
the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number
of JPEG images from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.390) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
 Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
 1 images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the image.
3 Process
 Press <0> and then the RAWprocessing options will appear
(p.274-276).
 Press the <V> and <U> keys to
select an option, and turn the <5>
dial to change the setting.
 The displayed image will reflect
“Brightness adjustment”, “White
balance”, and the other setting
adjustments.
 To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
272
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
 Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> dial to change
the setting. To finalize the change and
return to the screen in step 3, press
<0>.
the image.
4 Save
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
 To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
About the Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
Images shot in a Live View shooting aspect ratio ([4:3] [16:9] [1:1]) will
be displayed in the respective aspect ratio. JPEG images will also be
saved in the set aspect ratio.
When Wi-Fi function is used, RAW image processing cannot be performed.
273
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image-processing Options
Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
White balance (p.120)

You can select the white balance. If you select [P], turn the <6> dial
to set the color temperature on the setting screen. The displayed image
will reflect the setting’s effect.
Picture Style (p.112)

You can select the Picture Style. To set the parameters such as
sharpness, press <0> to display the setting screen. Press the <U>
key to select the Picture Style. Turn the <5> dial to select a parameter
to be adjusted, then press the <U> key to set it. To finalize the setting
and return to the screen in step 3, press <0>. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.125)

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will reflect
the setting’s effect.
High ISO speed noise reduction (p.126)

You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
press the <u> button to magnify the image. (Press the <u> button
again to return to the normal view.)
Image quality (p.102)

You can set the image quality of the JPEG image to be saved when
converting the RAW image. The image size displayed, such as [***M
****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The pixel count of each aspect ratio is
indicated in the table on page 278.
274
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

Color space (p.140)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look very
different when either color space is set.

Peripheral illumination correction (p.131)
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is
difficult to discern, press the <u> button to magnify the image and
check the corners. (Press the <u> button again to return to the normal
view.) The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will
be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional (provided
software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use Digital Photo
Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.

Distortion correction
When [Enable] is set, image distortion due to the lens characteristics is
corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The
image periphery will be cropped in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, use the Picture Style’s
sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary.
When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable], AF
point display information (p.240) and Dust Delete data (p.281) will not be
appended to the image.
275
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Chromatic aberration correction

When [Enable] is set, the lens’ chromatic aberrations (color fringing
along the subject’s outline) can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, press
the <u> button to magnify the image. (Press the <u> button again to
return to the normal view.)
About Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion
Correction, and Chromatic Aberration Correction
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction with the camera, the data of the lens used
for the shot must be registered in the camera. If the lens data has not been
registered in the camera, use EOS Utility (provided software, p.390) to
register the lens data.
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results as
processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
276
S Resize
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 The images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Press the <U> key to select the
desired image size, then press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
 To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
277
S Resize
Resize Options According to Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings
Original Image Size
3
4
a
b
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
a
c
k
b
About Image Sizes
The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as
[***M ****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to
aspect ratios is shown in the table below.
The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the
aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
a
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
When Wi-Fi function is used, resizing is not possible.
278
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.390).
About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
279
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any
time, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the dialog screen,
then press <0>.
 The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. Although
there will be a shutter sound, a
picture is not taken.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
280
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.390) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity
(∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtain the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Select [OK] and press <0>. After
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, a
picture is not taken.
281
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Photograph
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.




- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
Select [OK], and the menu will reappear.
If the data was not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page, then
select [OK]. Take the picture again.
About the Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,
p.390) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.
282
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a blower, etc. Before cleaning the sensor,
detach the lens from the camera.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon
Service Center is recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean manually].
2 Select
 Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.
[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged. If the battery grip with sizeAA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.
283
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.
 If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
284
12
Printing Images
 Printing (p.288)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compatible with
“wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.
You can also use a wireless LAN to send images to a
PictBridge (Wireless LAN) printer and print them. For
details, refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual.
 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.295)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
 Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.299)
You can specify images in the card for printing in a
photobook.
285
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to the Printer
1
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
up the printer.
2 Set
 For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
the camera to the
3 Connect
printer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
 To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
 Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
286
Preparing to Print
wPictBridge
back the image.
6 Play
 Press the <x> button.
 The image will appear, and the <w>
icon will appear on the upper left to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
 Movies cannot be printed.
 The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
 Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
 If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.294).
 Printing is not possible in the following cases: The shooting mode is set
to <F> or <G> in the <8> mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set,
or HDR mode is set.
 Under the [53] tab, if [Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], direct printing is not
possible. Set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable], then connect the interface cable.
 You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
 If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery pack, you can print for approx. 5 hr.
30 min.
 Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
 For direct printing, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the camera is
recommended.
287
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
1
Select the image to be printed.
 Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be printed.
<0>.
2 Press
 The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets the printing effects (p.290).
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on
or off.
Sets the quantity to be printed.
Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.293).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and trimming may not be selectable.
[Paper settings].
3 Select
 Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
 The paper settings screen will
appear.
288
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
 Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
 Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
 Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
Bordered
The print will have white borders along the edges.
Borderless
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
Borderedc
The shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13 cm and larger prints.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20-upc
35-upp
Default
20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*2.
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.
*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.
*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.295), you
should print by following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.298).
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If
the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer
number of pixels.
289
w Printing
the printing effects.
4 Set
 Set it if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
 What is displayed on the screen
differs depending on the printer.
 Select the option, then press <0>.
 Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
 If the <e> icon is displayed brightly
next to <z>, you can also adjust
the printing effect (p.292).
Printing Effect
Description
EOn
The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.
The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.
EOff
No automatic correction will be applied.
EVivid
The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments
than with “Natural.”
EDefault
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left. Note that the printed image may look slightly
different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This
also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 292.
If the shooting information of an image shot at the H1 or H2 ISO speed is
imprinted, the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
290
w Printing
the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
 Set them if necessary.
 Select <I>, then press <0>.
 Set as desired, then press <0>.
the number of copies.
6 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Select <R>, then press <0>.
 Set the number of copies, then press
<0>.
printing.
7 Start
 Select [Print], then press <0>.
 The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
 Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
 If image tilt correction (p.293) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
 To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
 If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.56), all the settings
will revert to their defaults.
291
w Printing
e Adjustment of Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 290, select the printing
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed
brightly next to <z>, you can press
the <B> button. You can then adjust
the printing effect. What can be adjusted
or what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
 Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
 Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press the
<B> button to change the position of the
<h>. Press the <U> key to freely adjust the
shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).
 kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face look
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
 Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
 The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
 When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for
green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.
 If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
292
w Printing
Trimming the Image
Tilt correction
You can crop the image and print only
the trimmed portion as if the image was
recomposed.
Set the trimming right before printing.
If you set the trimming and then set the
print settings, you may have to set the
trimming again before printing.
1 On the print settings screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
 The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The
trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the trimming frame size
Turn the <6> dial to change the trimming frame size. The smaller the
trimming frame, the larger the image magnification will be for printing.
Moving the trimming frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Rotating the frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the trimming frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a
vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image tilt correction
By turning the <5> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the image
tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.
 The print settings screen will reappear.
 You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the
print settings screen.
293
w Printing
 Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area may not be printed as
you specified.
 The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
 While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look
at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
294
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
[Set up].
2 Select
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
the option as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
[Print type]
[Date]
[File No.]
295
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images
from the card and try to print them.
 Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing. Or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may
not be possible.
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.286).
296
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
 Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Quantity
Total images selected
Checkmark
Index icon
[Standard] [Both]
Press <V> and a print order for one
copy of the displayed image will be
placed.
[Index]
Press <0> to include images with a
checkmark <X> in the index print.
 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will
all be canceled.
 All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set “Byn” or “All image”.
 When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be
printed.
297
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1
Prepare to print.
 See page 286.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to the Printer” procedure up to
step 5.
2 Under the [31] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
 [Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.288).
 Set the printing effects (p.290) if necessary.
5 Select [OK].




Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
 Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
 If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop
the printing and any of the following occurs:
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted
print-ordered images.
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before
resuming the printing.
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.
 If a problem occurs during printing, see page 294.
298
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and
use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the
selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is
useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a
printer.
Specify One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
 An image will be displayed.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
image, then press <0>.
 Repeat this step to select other
images. The number of images which
have been specified will be displayed
on the screen’s upper left.
 To cancel the specified image, press
<0> again.
 To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
299
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera
for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be
overwritten.
RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
300
13
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Also, the current camera settings can be saved under
the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions.
The functions explained in this chapter work only in the
Creative Zone modes.
Creative Z
on
e
301
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
1 Select [8].
the group.
2 Select
 Select one of the C.Fn I-III, then
press <0>.
Custom Function number
the Custom Function
3 Select
number.
 Press the <U> key to select the
Custom Function number, then press
<0>.
the setting as desired.
4 Change
 Select the desired setting (number),
then press <0>.
 Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set
another Custom Functions.
 At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
the setting.
5 Exit
 Press the <M> button.
 The screen for step 2 will reappear.
Clearing All Custom Functions
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the [8C.Fn III -2:
Focusing screen] and [8C.Fn III -5: Custom Controls] settings will be
retained.
302
3 Custom FunctionsN
A LV
Shooting
C.Fn I: Exposure
1
Exposure level increments
2
ISO speed setting increments
3
Bracketing auto cancel
4
Bracketing sequence
5
Number of bracketed shots
6
Safety shift
p.304
p.305
p.306
2
2
2
2
2
2
k Movie
Shooting
2
In a
(Still photo,
with WB
bracketing)
C.Fn II: Autofocus
1
Tracking sensitivity
2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
3
AI Servo 1st image priority
4
AI Servo 2nd image priority
5
AF-assist beam firing
6
Lens drive when AF impossible
7
Orientation linked AF point
8
Superimposed display
p.307
p.308
p.309
p.310
With
f*
With
f
With
f
With
f
With
f
With
With
f
f
* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the d and c.
9
AF Microadjustment
p.311
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
1
Dial direction during Tv/Av
p.311
2
Focusing screen
p.312
3
Multi function lock
4
Warnings ! in viewfinder
5
Custom Controls
2
2
2
2
p.313
Depends on setting
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
303
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn I -1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when
you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop
increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor as shown below.
C.Fn I -2
ISO speed setting increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1-stop
C.Fn I -3
Bracketing auto cancel
0: On
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white balance
bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
1: Off
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if
you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you
switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB
range will be retained.)
304
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -4
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be
changed.
0: 0a-a+
1: -a0a+
2: +a0aWhite Balance Bracketing
AEB
B/A Direction
0 : Standard exposure
M/G Direction
0 : Standard white balance
0 : Standard white balance
- : Decreased exposure - : Biased toward blue
- : Biased toward magenta
+ : Increased exposure
+ : Biased toward green
C.Fn I -5
+ : Biased toward amber
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be
changed from the usual 3 shots to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0] is set, the bracketed shots will be taken as
shown in the table below.
0: 3 shots
1: 2 shots
2: 5 shots
3: 7 shots
(1-stop increments)
1st Shot
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
+1
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
0: 3 shots
Standard (0)
-1
1: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
2: 5 shots
Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
3: 7 shots
Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
+2
+3
With setting 1, you can select the + or - amount when setting AEB.
305
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -6
Safety shift
0: Disable
1: Shutter speed/Aperture
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture-priority AE (f)
modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot
be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically
change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard exposure.
2: ISO speed
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and aperturepriority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard
exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will
automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard
exposure.
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.
 The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto ISO range] setting (p.110).
However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto ISO range],
the safety shift will take effect up to the manually set ISO speed.
 If [Shutter speed/Aperture] or [ISO speed] is set, safety shift will take
effect if necessary even when flash is used.
306
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II: Autofocus
C.Fn II -1
Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during AI
Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points
or when the AF points stray from the subject.
[0]
Default setting suited for most subjects. Suited for normal, moving subjects.
[Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1]
The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle enters
the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The -2 setting makes
the camera track the target subject longer than with the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses the wrong subject, it may take slightly longer
to switch and focus the target subject.
[Responsive: +2 / Responsive:+1]
Once an AF point tracks a subject, the camera can focus consecutive subjects
at different distances. Also effective when you want to always focus on the
closest subject. The +2 setting makes it quicker to focus the next consecutive
subject than with +1.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
307
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving
subjects whose speed can suddenly change
dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly, etc.
[0]
Suited for subjects that move at a fixed speed.
[+2/+1]
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/
deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed suddenly
changes dramatically, the camera continues to focus the target subject. For
example, for an approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to
focus behind it to avoid subject blur.
For a subject stopping suddenly, the camera becomes less prone to focus in
front of it. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s
speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the
subject, the focusing may be unstable momentarily.
C.Fn II -3
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and
shutter-release timing for the first shot during
continuous shooting with AI Servo AF.
[Equal priority]
Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release.
[Release priority] ( )
Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has not
been achieved. It is effective when you want give priority to the shutter chance
rather than to focus.
[Focus priority] ( )
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus has been
achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot.
308
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -4
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and
shutter-release timing during continuous shooting
after the first shot with AI Servo AF.
[Equal priority]
Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed. In low light
or with low-contrast subjects, shooting speed may slow down.
[Shooting speed priority] (
)
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus.
The continuous shooting speed does not slow down. Convenient when you
want to maintain the continuous shooting speed.
[Focus priority] ( )
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting speed.
The picture is not taken until focus is achieved. Effective when you want to
achieve focus before capturing the shot.
C.Fn II -5
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
0: Enable
The Speedlite will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.
1: Disable
The Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. This prevents the AF-assist
beam from disturbing others.
2: IR AF assist beam only
Among external Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist beam
will be able to emit the beam. This prevents the AF-assist light from firing as a
burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED light will not
automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If the external Speedlite’s Custom Function [AF-assist beam firing] is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted.
309
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -6
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep
searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
0: Continue focus search
1: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive stops. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus
due to focus searching.
Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous
focus search, taking more time to achieve focus the next time. Therefore,
setting [Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses.
C.Fn II -7
Orientation linked AF point
Instead of using the same AF point for both vertical and horizontal shooting, you
can select and use different AF points for both.
0: Same for both vertical/horizontal
The AF point you select manually will be used for both vertical and horizontal
shooting.
1: Select diffent AF points
The AF point can be selected separately for each camera orientation (1.
Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the
camera grip at the bottom). Convenient when, for instance, you want to keep
using the right AF point during all camera orientations.
When you manually select an AF point in one of the three orientations (1., 2.,
or 3.), this setting will take effect. When you change the camera orientation,
the AF point will also change to the AF point corresponding to the one you
selected manually.
C.Fn II -8
Superimposed display
0: On
1: Off
When focus is achieved, the AF point(s) in the viewfinder do not light up in
red. Set this if the AF point’s red light-up is bothersome.
The AF point will still light up in red when you select it.
310
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -9
AF Microadjustment
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting or
Live View shooting in the Quick mode. For details, see page 314.
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
C.Fn III -1 Dial direction during Tv/Av
0: Normal
1: Reverse direction
The dial’s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture can be
reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5> dials
will be reversed. In the other shooting modes, the turning direction of only the
<6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s turning direction will be the same
for the <a> mode and for setting the exposure compensation.
311
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III -2 Focusing screen
If you change the focusing screen, change this setting to match the focusing
screen so that correct exposures are obtained.
0: Eg-A II
1: Eg-D
2: Eg-S
About focusing screen characteristics
Eg-A II: Standard Precision Matte
Standard focusing screen that comes with the camera. It provides
both adequate viewfinder brightness and manual focusing ease.
Eg-D : Precision Matte with Grid
The focusing screen has grid lines. It helps
to keep the picture horizontal or vertical.
Eg-S : Super Precision Matte
Makes it easier to see the perfect focus
than with the Eg-A II. Convenient if you
often focus manually.
 Although the Eg-A focusing screen can be installed in this camera, it will
not obtain the correct exposure.
Maximum Lens Aperture with Super Precision Matte Eg-S
 Optimum for lenses whose maximum aperture is f/2.8 or larger.
 If you use a lens whose maximum aperture is smaller than f/2.8, the
viewfinder will look darker than with the Eg-A II focusing screen.
 This setting will be retained even if you select [8: Clear all Custom
Func. (C.Fn)].
 Since this camera’s standard focusing screen is Eg-A II, C.Fn III -2-0 is
set upon factory shipment.
 For details on changing the focusing screen, refer to the focusing
screen’s instruction manual. If the focusing screen does not come down
together with the holder, tilt the camera toward you.
312
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III -3 Multi function lock
When the <R> switch is set to the right, it will prevent the <6>, <5> dial,
and <9> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to append a
checkmark <X> and select [OK].
6 Main Dial
5 Quick Control Dial
9 Multi-controller
 If the <R> switch is set and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. Also, on the shooting function settings display (p.48), [LOCK] will
be displayed.
 By default, when the <R> switch is set to the right, the <5> dial
will be locked.
C.Fn III -4 Warnings ! in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <h> icon can be displayed on the
lower left in the viewfinder (p.23).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, press <0> to
append a <X>, then select [OK]. When this is set, the < > icon will also
appear for shooting function settings (p.48).
When monochrome V is set
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.113), the warning icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
If white balance correction (p.123) is set, the warning icon will appear.
When ISO expansion is used
If the ISO speed is set manually to L (50), H1 (51200), or H2 (102400) (p.107),
the warning icon will appear.
When spot metering is set
If the metering mode is set to [Spot metering] (p.150), the warning icon will appear.
C.Fn III -5 Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your
preferences. For details, see page 320.
313
8: AF Microadjustment
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting in the Quick mode. This is called “AF
Microadjustment”. Before making the adjustment, read “Notes for AF
Microadjustment” on page 319.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Do this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent
correct focusing from being achieved.
1: Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. During AF,
regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by
the adjustment amount.
1
Select [C.Fn II: Autofocus].
 Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn II:
Autofocus], then press <0>.
[9]:[AF Microadjustment].
2 Select
 Select [9]:[AF Microadjustment],
then press <0>.
[1: All by same amount].
3 Select
 Select [1: All by same amount].
the <Q> button.
4 Press
 The [1: All by same amount] screen
will appear.
314
8: AF Microadjustment
the adjustment.
5 Make
 Press the <U> key to make the





adjustment. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
Select [1: All by same amount], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit.
the result of the
6 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.236) to check the
adjustment result.
 When the resulting picture is focused
in front of the targeted point, adjust
toward the “+: ” side. When the
resulting picture is focused behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, do the adjustment
again.
If [1: All by same amount] is selected, AF adjustment will not be possible
for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
315
8: AF Microadjustment
2: Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment has been registered,
the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. If you use a zoom
lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [2: Adjust by lens].
 Select [2: Adjust by lens].
the <Q> button.
2 Press
 The [2: Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens information.
3 Check
Check the lens information.
 Press the <B> button.
 The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
 If the lens’ serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. Enter the number as
indicated below. See the next page
about the asterisk “ * ” displayed in
front of the lens serial number.
316
8: AF Microadjustment
Enter the serial number.
 Press the <U> key to select the
digit to be entered, then press <0>
to display <r>.
 Press the <V> key to enter the
number, then press <0>.
 After entering all the digits, select
[OK] and press <0>.
About the Lens Serial Number
 In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you cannot register several copies of the same lens
model. Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain
displayed.
 The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial
number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a defect.
 If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers in
step 3.
 If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
 The location of the serial number differs depending on the lens.
 Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number in
step 3.
 If [2: Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the
adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
 If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
317
8: AF Microadjustment
Single focal length lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
 For a zoom lens, press the <V> key

Zoom lens






and select the wide-angle (W) or
telephoto (T) end. Press <0> and
the box will disappear, allowing you to
make the adjustment.
Press the <U> key to adjust as
desired, then press <0>. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the point of
focus in front of the standard point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the point of
focus to the rear of the standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat step 4 and
adjust it for the wide-angle (W) and
telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [2: Adjust by lens], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit.
5 Check the result of the adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the image (p.236) to check the
adjustment result.
 When the resulting picture is focused in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. When the resulting picture is focused
behind the targeted point, adjust toward the “-: ” side.
 If necessary, do the adjustment again.
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected relative to the adjustments made for the
wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or telephoto end
has been adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
318
8: AF Microadjustment
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [1: All by same
amount] and [2: Adjust by lens].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
 The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
 If you clear all the Custom Function settings (p.302), the AF
Microadjustment will be retained. However, the setting will become [0:
Disable].
 It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
 Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
 For checking the adjustment result, shooting at the 73 image-recording
quality is recommended.
 The adjustment amount of one step varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
 The AF adjustment of the FlexiZone - Single and u Live mode (contrast
AF) is not possible.
319
8: Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1
Select [C.Fn III: Operation/
Others].
 Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:
Operation/Others], then press
<0>.
[5]:[Custom Controls].
2 Select
 Select [5]:[Custom Controls], then
press <0>.
 The Custom Controls screen will
appear.
a camera button or dial.
3 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
a function.
4 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 3 will
reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
320
8: Custom Controls
With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to cancel
the Custom Control settings. Note that the [8C.Fn III -5: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [8: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
321
8: Custom Controls
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Metering and AF start
AF
2
AF stop
324
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
AF point direct selection
Metering start
324
AE lock/FE lock
2
AE lock
AE lock (while button pressed)
Exposure
2
AE lock (hold)
FE lock
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
325
)
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
External
flash
Image
Flash exposure compensation
Image quality
Picture Style
326
326
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
Operation
VF electronic level
326
Menu display
No function (disabled)
322
8: Custom Controls
*
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
* The AF stop button (
2
) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.
323
8: Custom Controls
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function.
Convenient when you want to lock the focus during AI Servo AF.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
: AF point direct selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with <9> without
pressing the <S> button.
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, only exposure metering is
performed.
: AE lock/FE lock
AE lock: When you press the button assigned to this function, you can
lock the exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Convenient
when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas
or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting.
FE lock: During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this
function will fire a preflash and record the required flash output
(FE lock).
324
8: Custom Controls
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter button.
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the button
again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different
areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
: FE lock
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial.
If Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting will take effect. Auto ISO
cannot be set. If you use this function in the <a> mode, you can adjust
the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter
speed and aperture.
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <6> or
<5> dial.
325
8: Custom Controls
: Flash exposure compensation
Press <0> to display the flash exposure compensation setting screen
(p.170) on the LCD monitor.
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.102) on the LCD monitor.
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen (p.112)
on the LCD monitor.
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
down and you can check the depth of field (p.147).
: IS start
With the lens’ IS switch set to <1>, the lens’ Image Stabilizer
operates when you press the button assigned to this function.
: VF electronic level
When you press the button assigned to this function, the viewfinder and
LCD panel will display an electronic level using the exposure level
indicator (p.61).
: Menu display
Pressing <0> will display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
326
3 Registering My MenuN
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.
1
Select [My Menu settings].
 Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.
[Register to My Menu].
2 Select
 Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the item, then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] and press <0> to register the
item.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
About My Menu Settings
 Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the
order, then press <0>.
 Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all
registered items.
 Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.
327
w Register Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1, C2)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1, C2)], then press
<0>.
[Register settings].
2 Select
 Select [Register settings], then
press <0>.
the Custom shooting mode.
3 Register
 Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] and press <0>.
 The current camera settings (p.329, 330) will be
registered under the Mode Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Updating
If you change any setting while you shoot in the <w> or <x> mode,
the Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the
changed setting(s). To enable this automatic update, in step 2, set
[Auto update set.] to [Enable]. The settings that can be automatically
updated are listed on pages 329 and 330.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the respective Mode Dial
position will revert to the default setting effective before you registered
the camera settings. The procedure is the same as step 3.
328
w Register Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings Registered
 Shooting Settings
Shooting mode + settings, ISO speed, exposure compensation,
flash exposure compensation, AF operation, AF point, drive mode,
and metering mode.
 Menu functions
[z1] Image quality, Beep, Release shutter without card, Image
review
[z2] Lens aberration correction (Peripheral illumination correction,
Chromatic aberration correction), External Speedlite control,
Mirror lockup
[z3] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,
White balance Shift/Bracketing, Color space
[z4] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO
speed NR, Highlight tone priority, Multiple exposure (setting),
HDR Mode (setting)
[A1] Live View shooting, AF method, Grid display, Aspect ratio,
Exposure simulation
[A2] Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[Z1] AF method, Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[Z2] Grid display, Movie recording size, Sound recording, Movie
recording count, Movie play count, Video snapshot
[x2] Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness
329
w Register Custom Shooting ModesN
[C.Fn I: Exposure]
Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift
[C.Fn II: Autofocus]
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking, AI
Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority, AFassist beam firing, Lens drive when AF impossible,
Orientation linked AF point, Superimposed display, AF
Microadjustment
[C.Fn III: Operation/Others]
Dial direction during Tv/Av, Focusing Screen, Multi function
lock, Custom Controls
 My Menu settings will not be registered.
 If the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you cannot select [54: Clear all
camera settings] and [8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
 Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you can change the
shooting function settings and menu settings.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w> and <x> (p.332, 333).
330
14
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Under the [54] tab, if you select [Certification Logo Display]
and press <0>, some of the logos of the camera’s certifications
will appear. Other certification logos can be found in this
Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s
package.
331
B Button Functions
When you press the <B> button
while the camera is ready to shoot, you
can display [Displays camera settings],
[Electronic level] (p.60), and [Displays
shooting functions] (p.333).
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option and
press <0> to append a checkmark
<X>.
 After making the selection, select
[OK], then press <0>.
 Note that you cannot remove the <X> for all three display options.
 The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
 Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered under the
Mode Dial’s w and x
(p.140)
(p.123, 124)
(p.314)
Color temperature
(p.122)
(p.128)
(p.126)
(p.31, 103)
332
B Button Functions
Shooting Function Settings
White balance correction
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Aperture
AE lock
Flash exposure compensation
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Exposure level
indicator
Picture Style
Wi-Fi function
Custom Controls
AF operation
Image-recording quality
Quick Control icon
Possible shots
Battery check
White balance
AF point selection
Eye-Fi card transmission status
GPS acquisition status
Logging function
Drive mode
Max. burst / Remaining
number of exposures
(multiple exposures)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Metering mode
White balance bracketing
Wi-Fi transmission status
 Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
settings (p.49).
 If you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <q>, or <S> button,
the respective setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and
you can turn the <6>, <5> dial, or <9> to set the function.
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings display” screen
is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power
again. To cancel this, press the <B> button to turn off the screen, then
turn off the power switch.
333
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery
Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N has a unique serial number, and you can register
multiple battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you
can check the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and
operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level icon (p.35) is displayed
together with the remaining battery
capacity shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current battery.
The number is reset when the battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance
is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is
recommended.
The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N is recommended.
If you use any battery other than the Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N, the
camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not counted.)
 The battery information will also be displayed when an LP-E6/LP-E6N
battery pack is in Battery Grip BG-E13. If you use size-AA/LR6 batteries,
only the battery level indicator will be displayed.
 If communication with the battery is not possible or irregular for some
reason, [Use this battery?] will be displayed. If you select [OK], you can
continue shooting. However, depending on the battery, the battery info
screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info correctly.
334
3 Checking the Battery Information
Registering the Battery to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6/LP-E6N battery packs to the camera.
To register multiple battery packs to the camera, do the procedure
below for each battery pack.
1
Press the <B> button.
 With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
 The battery history screen will
appear.
 If the battery has not been registered,
it will be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
 Select [Register], then press <0>.
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The battery pack will be registered,
and the battery history screen will
reappear.
 The grayed-out battery number will
now be displayed in white letters.
 Press the <M> button. The
battery info. screen will reappear.
 The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E13 (sold
separately) using AA/R6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered
by the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N
(sold separately).
 If six battery packs have already been registered, [Register] cannot be
selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, see page 337.
335
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling the Serial Number on the Battery
It is convenient to label all registered Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N with
their serial numbers, using commercially available labels.
Serial number
1
Write the serial number on a
label.
 Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
7c40
0300
out the battery and affix the
2 Take
label.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
 Affix the label as shown (side with no
electrical contacts) in the illustration.
 Repeat this procedure for all of your
battery packs so you can easily see
the serial number.
 Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E13, the label may peel off as you repeatedly
insert and remove the battery pack. If it peels off, affix a new label.
336
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even when
not installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number Date last used
Look for the serial number.
 Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
 You can check the respective battery
pack’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Remaining capacity
Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
 Follow step 2 on page 335 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted.
 Select the battery pack information to be deleted, then press
<0>.
 <X> will appear.
 To delete information for another battery pack, repeat this
procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The battery pack information will be deleted, and the screen in
step 1 will reappear.
337
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (both sold separately).
1
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
 Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
the power cord.
2 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the cord in the groove.
3 Place
 Insert the DC Coupler’s cord carefully
without damaging the cord.
the DC Coupler.
4 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
DC Coupler cord hole
and open the DC Coupler cord hole
cover.
 Insert the DC Coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
 Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the
camera’s power switch is set to <1>.
338
Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.31).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to
[Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], automatic
transmission will not occur even with
the Eye-Fi card inserted
(transmission status icon I).
339
Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
 For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
Transmission status icon
display (p.238).
H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H(Blinking) Connecting : Connection with access point.
H(Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H(d) Transferring
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
340
Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If [53: Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card is not
possible.
 If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
 The battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear on the menu. Also, the transmission status icon
<H> will not appear on the LCD monitor.
341
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
For Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Basic Zone
Function
All image quality settings
selectable
Automatically set/
ISO
Auto ISO
speed
Manual
Picture
Style
Creative Zone
8
2 3 4 5 6
F
o o o o o o o o
o
o o o o o o o o
Preset
Custom
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
G
d sf a F
k k k k k k k k*1 k*1 k k k k k
Automatically set/Auto o o o o o o o
Manual selection
Auto
White
balance
AC
o o o o o o o o
o k k k k k
k
o k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Lens
aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination
k k k k k k k
correction
Chromatic aberration
k k k k k k k
correction
Long exposure noise reduction
k
k k k k k k
k
k k k k k k
High ISO speed noise reduction o o o o o o o
Highlight tone priority
o
Multiple exposures
HDR shooting
Color
space
sRGB
One-Shot AF
AI Servo AF
AF
o o o o o o o o
Adobe RGB
o o o
o o
o
AI Focus AF
o o
o o o o o o o o
Manual focusing (MF) k k k k k k k k
AF point selection
AF Microadjustment
*1: RAW+JPEG and RAW cannot be selected.
342
k
o k
k
k
k
o k
k
o k
k
k
o k
k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Basic Zone
Function
A C
Creative Zone
8
2 3 4 5 6 F G d sf a F
Evaluative metering o o o o o o o o o k k k k k
Metering
Metering mode
mode
k k k k k
selection
Program shift
k
AE lock
k k k
Exposure
Exposure compensation
k k k
k k k k
AEB
Depth-of-field
preview
Single shooting
Drive
External
flash
k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Continuous shooting k
Silent single
k
shooting
Silent continuous
k
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
k
Remote control
2-sec. self-timer/
k
Remote control
Flash on
*2
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k
k k k k k
FE lock
k k k k k
Flash exposure
compensation
k k k k k
AF-assist beam
Live View Shooting
o o o o o
o o o k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Aspect ratio*3
k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
*2: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*3: Settable only for Live View shooting.
343
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
For Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Movie
Function
A C 8 d
y
All image quality settings
selection (movie)
k
k
Still Photos
s f F
k
k
k
k
k
M y k M
k
k
All image quality settings
selection (still photos)
Video snapshot
ISO
speed
Automatically set/Auto ISO
Picture
Style
Automatically set/Auto
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manual
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manual selection
Auto
z*1
a
Preset
Custom
White
balance Color temperature setting
Correction
o
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination
Lens
correction
aberration
Chromatic aberration
correction
correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction*2
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Highlight tone priority
Multiple exposures
HDR shooting
Color
space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2 : Multi shot noise reduction (M) cannot be set.
344
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie
Function
A C 8 d
y
FlexiZone - Singled
AF
Live mode c
Quick mode*3 f
Manual focusing (MF)
Metering mode
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
Still Photos
s f F
k
k
k
k
k
o
z*1
a
M y k M
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*4
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure Exposure compensation
k
k
AEB
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
Continuous shooting
Silent single shooting
Drive
Silent continuous shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
Remote control *5
2-sec. self-timer/
Remote control *5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
FE lock
External
flash
Flash exposure
compensation
AF-assist beam
o*6 o*6 o*6
Aspect ratio
Sound recording
k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k k k k k k k
*3 : During movie shooting, it will switch to [FlexiZoneAF (Single)].
*4 : With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*5 : Works only before you start shooting a movie.
*6 : If the AF method is [Quick mode], the external Speedlite will emit the AFassist beam if necessary during still shooting before you start shooting a
movie.
Time code
345
Menu Settings
For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality
Page
1*/41*/61*
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/c
102
Beep
Enable / Disable
-
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
32
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
55
* Not selectable in <F> or <G> mode.
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
131
External Speedlite
control
Flash firing / E-TTL metering / Flash
synchronization speed in Av mode / Flash
function settings / Flash C.Fn settings / Clear
settings
172
Mirror lockup
Disable / Enable
165
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
346
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Exposure
compensation/AEB
1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB ±3 stops)
151
152
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / ISO speed range / Auto ISO range
/ Minimum shutter speed
106
to
111
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
Disable / Low / Standard / High
OFF with M or Bulb
Q/W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
125
120
121
White balance shift/
bracketing
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
123
124
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
140
* During movie shooting, [Expo.comp./AEB] will be [Exposure comp.].
z: Shooting 4 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
112
to
119
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
128
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
126
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
130
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by provided software to
delete dust spots
281
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multi-expos control / No. of
exposures / Continue Multiple exposure
158
HDR Mode
Adjust dynamic range / Continuous HDR / Auto
Image Align
155
* During movie shooting, [Multiple exposure] and [HDR Mode] do not appear.
347
Menu Settings
A1: Live View shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Live View Shooting
Enable / Disable
AF method
FlexiZone- Single / u Live mode / Quick mode 192
187
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
187
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
188
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
189
A2: Live View shooting 2 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min. 191
190
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
Protect images
Erase-protect images
265
Rotate image
Rotate vertical images
246
Erase images
Erase images
267
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
295
Photobook Set-up
Specify images for a photobook
299
RAW image processing Process 1 images
348
272
Menu Settings
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Page
Resize
Downsize the image’s pixel count
277
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
247
Slide show
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
257
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
243
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
240
AF point display
Disable / Enable
240
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
237
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
240
Movie play count*
Rec time / Time code
221
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from
center) / 4x (magnify from center) / 8x (magnify
Magnification (Approx.) from center) / 10x (magnify from center) /
Actual size (from selected point) / Same as last
magnification (from center)
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
245
262
* This setting is linked to [Movie play count] under the [Z2] tab’s [Time code].
349
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Select folder
Create and select a folder
134
File number
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
136
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
270
Format card
Initialize and erase data on the card
53
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted
339
Auto power off
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable
55
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
LCD brightness
Seven brightness levels
269
LCD off / on button*1
Remains on / Shutter button
56
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min.,
sec.) / Daylight saving time / Time zone
36
LanguageK
Select the interface language
38
GPS
Select GPS device / Set up
*2
*1 During movie shooting, [LCD off / on btn] does not appear.
*2 For details, refer to the GPS Function Instruction Manual.
When using GPS function, be sure to check the countries and areas of use,
and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
350
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Video system
NTSC / PAL
216
264
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
63
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /
Displays shooting functions
332
Wi-Fi
Disable / Enable
Wi-Fi function
Transfer images between cameras / Connect
to smartphone / Remote control (EOS Utility) /
Print from Wi-Fi printer / Upload to Web service
/ View images on DLNA devices
*
* For details, refer to the Wi-Fi Function Instruction Manual.
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now
280
Clean manually
283
Battery info.
Power / Remaining capacity / Shutter count /
Recharge performance / Battery registration /
Battery history
334
to
337
Certification Logo
Display
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
331
Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to Mode
(C1, C2)
Dial’s w and x
328
Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings
56
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
zfirmware ver.
For updating the firmware
138
-
 When using Wi-Fi function, be sure to check the countries and areas of
use, and use it in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country
or region.
 If the camera is connected to a computer or printer, Wi-Fi cannot be set.
351
Menu Settings
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn II: Autofocus
304
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn III: Operation/
Others
Clear all Custom
Functions (C.Fn)
Page
307
311
Clear all Custom Function settings
302
Register frequently-used menu options and
Custom Functions
327
9: My Menu (Green)
My Menu settings
352
Menu Settings
For Movie Shooting
Z1: Movie1 (Red)
Page
AF method
FlexiZone- Single / u Live mode / Quick
mode
223
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
223
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min.
223
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
224
Movie recording size
1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4) (W / X)
1280x720 (8 / 7) (W / X)
640x480 (6 / 5) (X)
216
Z2: Movie2 (Red)
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*1
Recording level
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
218
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Time code
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
count / Movie play count*2 / Drop frame
220
Video snapshot: Disable / Enable
Video snapshot
Album settings: Create a new album / Add to
existing album
225
*1: In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will be
[On/Off].
*2: The setting is linked to [Movie play count] under the [x3] tab.
353
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT 270EX II
430EX III-RT/ 600EX II-RT Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
430EX III
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15
Focusing screen
Eg-A II
Rubber Frame Eb
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Wide Strap
EW-EOS6D
Battery Pack
LP-E6*1
Eyecup Eb
Angle Finder C
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6N*3
DR-E6*3
Battery Grip
BG-E13
Focusing screen
Eg-D Eg-S
Battery Charger
LC-E6 or LC-E6E
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
Battery Magazine
BGM-E13L for
BGM-E13A for
Hand Strap
LP-E6/LP-E6N
size-AA/LR6 batteries
E2
(attached to BG-E13) (attached to BG-E13)
354
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2*2
Remote
Controller
RC-6
Timer Remote Remote
Switch
Controller
RS-80N3
TC-80N3
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
Directional
Stereo
Microphone
DM-E1
EF lenses
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
TV/Video
EOS
Solution Disk
Connect Station
CS100
Interface Cable
IFC-200U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.)
PictBridge-compatible printer
Interface Cable
IFC-500U (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card reader
Card slot
Leather Case EH20-L
Computer
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6N can also be used.
*2: GPS Receiver GP-E2 is not compatible with the EOS 6D (N).
*3: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
* Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 is not compatible with the
EOS 6D (WG, N).
355
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.334) is 94% or higher, the
battery will not be recharged.
 Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon
Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery pack has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery pack failed (with a non-Canon battery
pack), the protection circuit will stop the charging and the lamp will blink in
orange at high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug
from the power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger.
Wait a few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If
the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
 If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the
charger is high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety
reasons (lamp off). During the charging, if the battery’s
temperature becomes high for any reason, the charging will stop
automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery temperature goes
down, the charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.
 Make sure the battery properly is installed in the camera (p.30).
 Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.30).
 Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.31).
 Recharge the battery (p.28).
356
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the
card, the access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few
seconds. When the image recording is completed, the power will
turn off automatically.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.28).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [54: Battery
info.] to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.334). If
the battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a
new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the
following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’ Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s transmission is enabled.
• GPS is enabled.
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.55).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor
will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The
camera’s power does not turn off.)
357
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-S and EF-M lenses (p.39).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.31).
 Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position
(p.31).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.31, 267).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot
be taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus
automatically, or focus manually (p.44, 97).
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 33 or 370.
358
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus.
 Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.39).
 To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.43,
44).
 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>
(p.42).
 In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster
shutter speed (p.144), set a higher ISO speed (p.106), use flash
(p.170), or use a tripod.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in
the AI Servo AF and AI Focus AF operations (p.69).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 Depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may become
slower.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail (such as a field of
grass), the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst
may be lower than the number mentioned on page 103.
359
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable
ISO speed range will be ISO 200-25600 (or up to ISO 12800 for
movie shooting). Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range
in [ISO speed range], you cannot set expanded ISO speeds (L, H,
H1, H2). When [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable],
ISO 100/125/160 can be set (p.130).
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
 If [z4: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto
Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. When [z4: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Disable], then the Auto Lighting Optimizer can
be set (p.130).
Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When
[Standard/Low/High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may
come out bright (p.151).
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
 When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.164).
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed
becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter
speed becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that
both the subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent
a slow shutter speed, under [z2: External Speedlite control],
set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/180-1/60 sec. auto] or
[1/180 sec. (fixed)] (p.173).
360
Troubleshooting Guide
The flash does not fire.
 If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set
[A2: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.190).
The flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash
will always be fired at full output (p.171).
 When the [Flash metering mode] flash Custom Function is set to
[TTL ] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at full output
(p.177).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
 If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the
Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the
camera. When the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is
canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with
the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z2: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync. speed
in Av mode] to [Auto] (p.173).
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you
shoot (p.181).
During Live View and movie shooting, a white <
red <E> icon is displayed.
> or
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the
white < > icon displayed, the still photo’s image quality may
deteriorate. If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the
Live View or movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.201,
233).
361
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot shoot a movie.
 Under the [53] tab, if you set [Wi-Fi] to [Enable], you cannot shoot
movies. Before shooting movies, set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable].
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. If the compression method is set to [IPB], use a card
with a reading/writing speed of at least 6 MB per sec. If the
compression method is set to [ALL-I (I-only)], use a card with a
reading/writing speed of at least 20 MB per sec (p.3). To find out
the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website.
 If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie
shooting will stop automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.209).
ISO 16000/20000/25600 cannot be set for movie shooting.
 Under [z3: ISO speed settings], if you set the [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [25600/H], the maximum ISO
speed for manual ISO speed setting will be expanded and then
ISO 16000/20000/25600 can be set. However, since shooting a
movie at ISO 16000/20000/25600 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as [H]).
362
Troubleshooting Guide
The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting.
 If you shoot a movie when [Maximum: 25600] is set with [ISO
speed range] and ISO speed is set to ISO 16000/20000/25600,
the ISO speed will switch to ISO 12800 (during movie shooting
with manual exposure). Even if you switch back to still photo
shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting.
 If you shoot a movie when 1. L (ISO 50) or 2. H1 (ISO 51200)/H2
(ISO 102400) is set, the ISO speed setting will switch to 1. ISO
100 or 2. H (ISO 25600) respectively (during movie shooting with
manual exposure). Even if you switch back to still photo shooting,
the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting,
the changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture
changes or not. Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a
result.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed
panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness)
or color tone may also be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow
shutter speed may solve the problem.
363
Troubleshooting Guide
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,
the movie shooting stops.
 Setting a lower image quality for still photos and shooting fewer
continuous still photos may resolve the problem.
Time code is off.
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a
discrepancy between the actual time and time code. When you
want to edit a movie using time code, it is recommended not to
shoot still photos during movie shooting.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi cannot be set.
 If the camera is connected to a printer, a computer, or a GPS
receiver, etc. with an interface cable, Wi-Fi cannot be set ([53]
tab’s [Wi-Fi] will be grayed out). Disconnect the interface cable,
then set the Wi-Fi.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5> dial, or <9>.
 Set the <R> switch to the left (lock release, p.47).
 Check the [8C.Fn III -3: Multi function lock] setting (p.313).
The camera button/dial’s function has changed.
 Check the [8C.Fn III -5: Custom Controls] setting (p.320).
364
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.
 In Basic Zone modes, certain tabs and menu options are not
displayed. Set a Creative Zone mode (p.51).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first
character will be an underscore (p.140).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number
may not start from 0001 (p.136).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
 Make sure the correct date and time has been set (p.36).
 Check the time zone and daylight savings time settings (p.36, 37).
The date and time is not in the picture.
 The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The
date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting
information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in
the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting
information (p.291, 295).
[###] is displayed.
 If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.248).
365
Troubleshooting Guide
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem
slow or may look black. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted
in the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to
the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s
connection status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.339).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.240).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.240).
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.265).
The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer using the provided ImageBrowser
EX (p.391) or other software cannot be played back with the
camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS Video
Snapshot Task (p.232) can be played on the camera.
366
Troubleshooting Guide
When the movie is played back, camera operation noise can be heard.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting,
the operation noise will also be recorded. Using the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended
(p.219).
The movie has still moments.
 During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. If this happens, shoot with <a> shooting mode (p.208).
No image appears on the TV screen.
 Use the stereo AV cable that came with the camera (p.264).
 Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all
the way in (p.261, 264).
 Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system
as the TV set (p.264).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be
created automatically (p.217).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC
cards may not be correctly recognized. If this occurs, connect your
camera to the computer with the provided interface cable, then
transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided
software, p.390).
I cannot process the RAW image.
 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera.
Use the provided software Digital Photo Professional to process
the image (p.390).
367
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot resize the image.
 c JPEG images and 1/41/61 images cannot be resized
with the camera (p.277).
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
 If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but
no picture is taken (p.280).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.34).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual.
 What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer.
This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available
(p.290).
Direct printing does not work.
 Under the [53] tab, if [Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], direct printing is
not possible. Set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable], then connect the camera to
the printer with an interface cable.
368
Troubleshooting Guide
Image Transfer Problems
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
 Install the EOS Utility software on the computer (p.390).
 Under the [53] tab, if [Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot
connect to a computer. Set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable], then connect the
camera to the computer with an interface cable.
369
Error Codes
Error number
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a Canon
lens (p.386, 20).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.31, 53).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
06
Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.31, 53, 267).
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on
again.
Operate the power switch (p.34).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and
on again or re-install the battery.
Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack again,
or use a Canon lens (p.30, 34).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your
nearest Canon Service Center.
370
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera
SD memory card, SDHC memory card*, SDXC memory
card*
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Approx. 35.8 x 23.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (except EF-S and EF-M lenses) (35 mmequivalent lens focal length will be as indicated on the lens)
Canon EF mount
* Compatible with UHS-I
Lens mount:
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 20.20 megapixels
3:2
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Recorded pixels:
File numbering:
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original), RAW+JPEG
simultaneous recording enabled
L (Large)
: Approx. 20.00 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M (Medium) : Approx. 8.90 megapixels (3648 x 2432)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.00 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 20.00 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M-RAW
: Approx. 11.00 megapixels (4104 x 2736)
S-RAW
: Approx. 5.00 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
Continuous, auto reset, manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
White balance:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (Approx. 2500-10000K), White balance correction,
and White balance bracketing possible
* Flash color temperature information transmission enabled
371
Specifications
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration correction:
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Eye-level pentaprism
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 97% (with Eye point approx.
21 mm)
Magnification:
Approx. 0.71x (-1 m-1 with 50 mm lens at infinity)
Eye point:
Approx. 21 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Built-in dioptric adjustment: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Focusing screen:
Eg-A II provided, interchangeable
Electronic level:
Horizontal: 1° increments, ±9°
* During horizontal shooting only
Mirror:
Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
• Autofocus
Type:
AF points:
Focusing brightness
range:
Focus operation:
AI Servo AF
characteristics:
AF fine adjustment:
AF-assist beam:
372
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection
11 AF points
Center: Cross-type AF at f/5.6
Center: Vertical line-sensitive AF at f/2.8
EV -3 - 18
(at center AF point [sensitive to f/2.8 and f/5.6], room
temperature, ISO 100)
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing
(MF)
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or
Adjust by lens)
Emitted by the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite
Specifications
• Exposure Control
Metering modes:
63-zone TTL full-aperture metering
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 8.0% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.5% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
Metering range:
EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature with EF50mm f/1.8 II
lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Creative Auto,
Special scene (Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports,
Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight
Control), Program), Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority
AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure
ISO speed:
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - 12800 set automatically
(Recommended
* Landscape: ISO 100 - 1600 set automatically, Handheld
exposure index)
Night Scene: ISO 100 - 25600 set automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - 25600 (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to L
(equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400)
ISO speed settings:
ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO
minimum shutter speed settable
Exposure compensation: Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
AE lock:
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range
adjustment:
Auto image align:
Auto, ±1 EV, ±2 EV, ±3 EV
Possible
• Multiple Exposures
Number of multiple
exposures:
Multiple-exposure
control:
2 to 9 exposures
Additive, Average
373
Specifications
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speeds:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb, X-sync at 1/180 sec.
• Drive System
Drive modes:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst:
Single shooting, Continuous shooting, Silent single
shooting, Silent continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/
remote control, 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
Continuous shooting: Max. approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 73 shots (approx. 1250 shots)
RAW: Approx. 14 shots (approx. 17 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 7 shots (approx. 8
shots)
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) and an 8 GB card.
• External Speedlite
Compatible Speedlites:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
External Speedlite
control:
EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
Provided
* Compatible with radio wireless flash photography.
• Live View Shooting
Aspect ratio settings:
Focus methods:
Focusing brightness
range:
374
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
FlexiZone - Single, Face detection Live mode (contrast
detection), Quick mode (phase-difference detection),
Manual focusing (Approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
EV 1 - 18 (with contrast detection, at room temperature,
ISO 100)
Specifications
Metering modes:
Metering range:
Silent shooting:
Grid display:
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 11% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 3% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature with EF50mm f/1.4 USM
lens, ISO 100)
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Three types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie
Audio
Recording size
and frame rate:
MOV
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Linear PCM
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p
1280x720 (HD)
: 60p/50p
640x480 (SD)
: 30p/25p
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps,
60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps
Compression method: IPB, ALL-I (I-only)
File size:
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) / IPB : Approx. 235 MB/min.
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) / ALL-I : Approx. 685 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p) / IPB
: Approx. 205 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p) / ALL-I
: Approx. 610 MB/min.
640x480 (30p/25p) / IPB
: Approx. 78 MB/min.
* Card reading/writing speed necessary for movie
shooting: IPB: at least 6 MB per sec./ALL-I: at least 20
MB per sec.
Focusing:
Same as focusing with Live View shooting
Metering modes:
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focusing mode.
Metering range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature with EF50mm f/1.4 USM
lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE for movies and manual exposure
Exposure compensation:±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (±5 stops for still photos)
375
Specifications
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
Time code:
Drop frames:
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:
Grid display:
Still photo shooting:
With autoexposure: Auto ISO (automatically set within
ISO 100 - ISO 12800), Maximum and minimum ISO
speeds can be changed in Creative Zone modes
With manual exposure: Auto ISO (automatically set
within ISO 100 - ISO 12800), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
manually (in 1/3- or whole-stop increments), expandable
to H (equivalent to ISO 16000/20000/25600)
Supported
Compatible with 60p/30p
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal provided
Sound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Three types
Possible
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Feature guide / Help:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Displayable
• Playback
Image display formats: Single image display, Single image + Info display (Basic
info, shooting info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image
index
Highlight alert:
Overexposed highlights blink
AF point display:
Possible
Grid display:
Three types
Zoom magnification:
Approx. 1.5x - 10x, starting magnification and position settable
Image browsing methods: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Image rotate:
Possible
Ratings:
Provided
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT),
built-in speaker
376
Specifications
Slide show:
Background music:
Image protect:
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, or by
rating
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
Possible
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image
processing:
Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, and
Chromatic aberration correction
Resize:
Possible
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
My Menu registration:
Custom shooting modes:
Copyright information:
20
Possible
Register under Mode Dial’s C1/C2
Entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal:
Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio
output
Computer communication, Direct printing (Hi-Speed USB
or equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2 connection
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone IN
terminal:
φ3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
Remote control terminal: Compatible with N3-type remote controller
Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible
377
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery information:
Number of possible
shots:
(Based on CIPA
testing standards)
Movie shooting time:
Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N (Quantity 1)
* AC power usable with household power outlet accessories.
* With Battery Grip BG-E13 attached, size-AA/LR6
batteries can be used.
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 1090 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 980 shots at low temperature (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 220 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 190 shots at low temperature (0°C/32°F)
Approx. 1 hr. 35 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F)
Approx. 1 hr. 25 min. at low temperature (0°C/32°F)
(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6)
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 144.5 x 110.5 x 71.2 mm / 5.7 x 4.4 x 2.8 in.
Weight (EOS 6D (WG)): Approx. 755 g / 26.7 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 680 g / 24.0 oz. (Body only)
Weight (EOS 6D (N)): Approx. 750 g / 26.5 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 675 g / 23.8 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens maker.
378
379
380
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6/LP-E6N is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
381
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient
temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
382
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the
battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a
fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire,
burns or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire
and an electrical shock.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
383
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The
product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause battery leakage
or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
 Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other components. When
using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from excessively loud volume.
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein).
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive,
this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is
present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable
threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an
authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment
(EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste
could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to
potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the
effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or
www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
384
Handling Precautions:
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
The EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM utilizes a stepping motor that drives
the focus lens. The motor also controls the focus lens during zooming.
1. When the camera is OFF
The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the
camera is OFF due to the use of the auto power off function. Therefore,
users must be aware of the following points.
 Manual focus adjustments are not possible.
 During zooming, delayed focus will occur.
2. When the lens is in sleep mode
If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep
mode in order to save power. Sleep mode differs from when the camera
is OFF due to the use of the auto power off function. To exit sleep mode,
press the shutter button halfway.
In this state, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.
Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.
 Manual focus adjustments are not possible.
 During zooming, delayed focus will occur.
3. During initial reset
When the camera is ON or when the camera is turned ON by pressing
the shutter button halfway down when the camera is OFF due to the
use of the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of
the focus lens.*2
 Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus during
the initial reset, this does not mean that the lens has malfunctioned.
 Although the shutter can be released during the initial reset, users
must wait approximately 1 second*3 after the initial reset has
completed before shooting.
*1: Not applicable to the following EOS camera models: EOS 760D, EOS 750D,
EOS 700D, EOS 100D, EOS 650D
*2: With some cameras, the lens may perform an initial reset in order to improve
lens performance even at times other than described in this section.
*3:The initial reset time varies depending on camera being used.
385
Handling Precautions
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
Cautions regarding Prolonged Use
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for
a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a
malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight
skin burns.
386
15
Downloading Images
to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to download images from the
camera to your computer, gives an overview of the
software on the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on your computer.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution
Disk
(Software)
387
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use the provided software to download the images in the
camera to your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Download by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.392).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to download the
3 Use
images/movies.
 For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
Under the [53] tab, if [Wi-Fi] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot connect
to a computer. Set [Wi-Fi] to [Disable], then connect the interface cable.
388
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
If you have a commercially-available card reader, you can use it to
download images to your computer.
Install the software (p.392).
1
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Canon software to download
3 Use
the images/movies.
 Use Digital Photo Professional.
 Use ImageBrowser EX.
 For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual PDF.
When downloading images from the camera to your computer, with a card
reader without using Canon software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
389
About the Software
EOS Solution Disk XXX
EOS Solution Disk
This disk contains various software applications for EOS cameras.
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not
support still photos and movie files shot with this camera. Please
use the software provided with this camera.
a EOS Utility
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer
You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with
the camera to your computer.
You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.
You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your
computer.
You can copy background music tracks to the card, and play the
background music during playback.
b Digital Photo Professional
Image Viewing and Editing Software
You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at highspeed.
You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.
Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to
professionals. It is especially recommended for users who mainly
shoot RAW images.
c Picture Style Editor
Picture Style File Creating Software
This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.
You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and
create/save an original Picture Style file.
390
About the Software
An Internet connection is necessary to install the software below.
Insert the EOS Solution Disk into your Internet-connected computer.
d ImageBrowser EX
Image Viewing and Editing Software
Connect to the Internet to download and install the software.*
You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your computer.
You can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and extract
still photos from movies.
You can download additional functions, such as EOS Video Snapshot
Task (9?), with an internet connection.
Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first
time and amateur users.
* EOS Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX.
e Map Utility
GPS Software
Connect to the Internet to download and install the software.
Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen
by using the geotag information recorded using the GPS function.
The ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser programs that came with previous
cameras does not support the EOS 6D’s still photos and MOV movie files.
Use ImageBrowser EX.
391
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Windows
Compatible OS
1
Windows 8.1
Windows 8
Windows 7
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
 Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.
Click [Finish] when the installation has completed.
5
6 Remove the CD.
392
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Macintosh
Compatible OS
MAC OS X 10.8 - 10.9
1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD).
On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click [Canon EOS Digital Installer].
Select your geographic area, country and language.
3
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
Click [Restart] when the installation has completed.
5
6 Once the computer has restarted, remove the CD.
393
Index
Numerics
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay ............... 100
11-point AF auto selection ............ 94
1280x720 .................................... 216
1920x1080 .................................. 216
4- or 9-image index display ......... 242
640x480 ...................................... 216
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......... 66
AC Adapter ................................. 338
Access lamp ................................. 32
Adobe RGB ................................. 140
AE lock ........................................ 153
AEB ..................................... 152, 304
AF
AF method ...................... 192, 223
AF Microadjustment ............... 314
AF operation ............................. 92
AF point selection ............. 94, 324
AF-assist beam ...................... 309
Beep ....................................... 346
Difficulty focusing ............. 96, 196
Manual focusing ............... 97, 199
Out of focus .......... 42, 43, 96, 196
Recompose .............................. 69
AF point ........................................ 94
AF-ON (AF start) button ................ 44
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) .............. 93
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) .............. 93
Tracking sensitivity ......... 307, 308
AI Servo AF ............................ 69, 93
ALL-I (I-only) ............................... 216
Ambience-based shots ................. 84
Aperture-priority AE .................... 146
Aspect ratio ................................. 188
Attenuator ................................... 218
Audio/video output .............. 251, 261
394
Auto Lighting Optimizer ...............125
Auto playback ..............................257
Auto power off .........................34, 55
Auto reset ....................................137
Auto rotate ...................................270
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection of AF point .....94
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............146
B
B (Bulb) .......................................154
Basic Zone modes ........................24
Battery ...............................28, 30, 35
Battery Grip ...........................35, 354
Beep ............................................346
BGM ............................................260
Black-and-white image ...84, 113, 117
Bracketing ...................124, 152, 304
Bulb exposures ...........................154
C
w (Custom shooting) .................328
C (Creative Auto) ........................71
Cable ...............4, 261, 264, 354, 388
Camera
Camera shake ........................165
Clear camera settings ...............56
Holding the camera ...................43
Settings display .......................332
Cards ...........................3, 31, 53, 386
Card reminder ...........................32
Formatting .................................53
Low-level formatting ..................54
Problems .............................33, 54
Write-protect switch ..................31
Center-weighted
average metering ........................150
Charger ...................................26, 28
Chromatic aberration correction ...132
Index
Cleaning ...................................... 279
Clear camera settings ................... 56
Close-ups ...................................... 77
Color space ................................. 140
Color temperature ............... 120, 122
Color tone ................................... 116
Continuous file numbering .......... 136
Continuous shooting ..................... 98
Contrast ...................................... 116
Copyright information .................. 138
Creative Auto ................................ 71
M icon ............................................ 6
Creative Zone modes .................... 24
Custom Controls ................... 50, 320
Custom Functions ....................... 302
Custom shooting mode ............... 328
Custom white balance ................. 121
D
Date and time ................................ 36
Daylight saving time ...................... 37
DC Coupler ................................. 338
Depth-of-field preview ... 147, 180, 184
Dial
Main Dial ................................... 45
Quick Control Dial ..................... 46
Digital terminal .................... 286, 388
Dioptric adjustment ....................... 43
Direct printing .............................. 298
Direct selection (of AF point) ....... 324
DPOF .......................................... 295
Drive mode .............................. 73, 98
Dust Delete Data ......................... 281
E
Electronic level ...................... 60, 326
Erasing images ........................... 267
Error codes ................................. 370
Evaluative metering .................... 149
Exposure compensation ............. 151
Exposure level increments ......... 304
Exposure level indicator ....... 23, 333
Exposure simulation ................... 189
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup ....................................... 166
Eye-Fi card ................................. 339
Eyepiece cover ..................... 27, 166
F
FE lock ....................................... 170
Feature guide ............................... 63
FEB (flash exposure bracketing) ... 176
File extension ............................. 137
File name .................................... 136
File size ...................... 103, 217, 238
Filter effect .................................. 117
Final image simulation ........ 184, 212
Fine (image-recording quality) .... 102
Firmware version ........................ 351
First-curtain synchronization ...... 175
Flash (Speedlite)
Custom Functions .................. 177
External Speedlite .................. 170
FE lock ................................... 170
Flash control .......................... 172
Flash exposure
compensation ................. 170, 176
Flash-sync speed ........... 171, 173
Manual flash ........................... 174
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ..................... 175
Wireless ................................. 175
Flash exposure
compensation ..................... 170, 176
Flash mode ................................. 174
395
Index
Flash-sync contacts ...................... 20
Focus confirmation light ................ 66
Focus lock ..................................... 69
Focus mode switch ......... 39, 97, 199
Focusing 9 AF
Folder creation/selection ............. 134
Formatting (card initialization) ....... 53
Frame rate .................................. 216
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ..................... 216, 251, 261
G
GPS ............................................ 350
Grid display ................. 187, 224, 237
H
Handheld Night Scene .................. 80
HDMI ................................... 251, 261
HDMI CEC .................................. 262
HDR ............................................ 155
HDR Backlight Control .................. 81
Help .............................................. 64
High ISO speed noise reduction ... 126
High-Definition (HD) .... 216, 251, 261
Highlight alert .............................. 240
Highlight detail loss ..................... 240
Highlight tone priority .................. 130
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ...... 240
Hot shoe ............................... 20, 170
Household power ........................ 338
I
ICC profile ................................... 140
Illumination (LCD panel) ............... 48
Image dust prevention ................ 279
Image review ................................ 55
Image-recording quality .............. 102
396
Images
AF point display ......................240
Auto playback .........................257
Auto rotate ..............................270
Erasing ....................................267
Highlight alert ..........................240
Histogram display ...................240
Index .......................................242
Jump display
(image browsing) ....................243
Magnified view ........................244
Manual rotate ..........................246
Numbering ..............................136
Playback .................................235
Protecting ................................265
Rating .....................................247
Shooting information ...............238
Slide show ..............................257
Viewing on TV .................251, 261
Index display ...............................242
INFO. button ........182, 210, 236, 332
IPB ..............................................216
ISO speed ...................106, 206, 209
Automatic setting (Auto) .........108
Automatic setting range ..........110
ISO expansion ........................109
Manual setting range ..............109
Minimum shutter speed ..........111
Setting increments ..................304
J
JPEG ...........................................102
Jump display ...............................243
L
Landscapes ...................................76
Language ......................................38
Large (image-recording quality) ...103
LCD monitor ................................386
Brightness adjustment ............269
Electronic level ..........................60
Image playback .......................235
Index
Menu screen ..................... 51, 346
Shooting function settings
display .............................. 48, 333
LCD panel ..................................... 22
Lens ........................................ 25, 39
Chromatic aberration correction ....... 132
Image Stabilizer ........................ 42
Lock release ............................. 40
Peripheral illumination correction ........ 131
Lens hood ..................................... 41
Lighting/scene based shots .......... 87
Live View shooting ................ 70, 179
Aspect ratio ............................. 188
Exposure simulation ............... 189
Face detection Live mode ...... 193
FlexiZoneAFo (Single) ............ 192
Grid display ............................. 187
Information display ................. 182
Manual focusing ..................... 199
Metering timer ......................... 191
Possible shots ........................ 181
Quick Control .......................... 185
Quick mode ............................ 197
Silent shooting ........................ 190
LOCK ............................................ 47
Long exposure noise reduction ... 128
Long exposures .......................... 154
M
M (manual exposure) .......... 148, 208
Macro photography ....................... 77
Magnification ............................... 245
Magnified view .................... 199, 244
Main Dial ....................................... 45
Malfunction .................................. 356
Manual exposure ................ 148, 208
Manual focusing .................... 97, 199
Manual reset ............................... 137
Manual selection (AF) ................... 94
Maximum burst ................... 103, 105
Medium (image-recording
quality) ................................ 103, 277
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu ............................................ 51
My Menu ................................ 327
Setting procedure ..................... 52
Settings .................................. 346
3 icon ...................................... 6
Metering mode ........................... 149
Metering timer .................... 191, 223
MF (manual focusing) ........... 97, 199
Microadjustment ......................... 314
Microphone ......................... 204, 219
Mirror lockup ............................... 165
Mode Dial ............................... 24, 45
Monochrome images .... 84, 113, 117
Movies ........................................ 203
AE lock ................................... 205
AF method ..................... 215, 223
Attenuator .............................. 218
Autoexposure shooting .......... 204
Compression method ............. 216
Drop frame ............................. 222
Editing .................................... 255
Editing out first and last
scenes .................................... 255
Enjoying ................................. 251
External microphone .............. 219
File size .................................. 217
Frame rate ............................. 216
Grid display ............................ 224
Information display ................. 210
Manual exposure shooting ....... 208
Metering timer ........................ 223
Microphone .................... 204, 219
Movie-recording size .............. 216
Playback ........................ 251, 253
Quick Control ......................... 215
Recording time ....................... 217
397
Index
Silent shooting ........................ 223
Sound recording ..................... 218
Still photo shooting ................. 213
Time code ............................... 220
Video snapshot album ............ 225
Video snapshots ..................... 225
Viewing on TV ................ 251, 261
Wind filter ............................... 218
M-RAW (Medium RAW) .............. 104
Multi Shot Noise Reduction ........ 126
Multi-controller ........................ 47, 94
Multi-function lock ......................... 47
Multiple exposures ...................... 158
My Menu ..................................... 327
N
Night Portrait ................................. 79
Night scenes ........................... 79, 80
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ...................... 126
Long exposures ...................... 128
Nomenclature ............................... 20
Non-Canon flash units ................ 171
Normal (image-recording quality) ... 102
NTSC .................................. 216, 351
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ........... 92
P
P (Program AE) .......................... 142
PAL ..................................... 216, 351
Partial metering ........................... 149
Peripheral illumination correction ... 131
Personal white balance ............... 122
Photobook set-up ........................ 299
PictBridge ................................... 285
Picture Style ................ 112, 115, 118
Pixels .......................................... 102
398
Playback ......................................235
Portraits .........................................75
Possible shots ...............35, 103, 181
Power
Auto power off ...........................55
Battery check ....................35, 334
Battery info ..............................334
Household power ....................338
Possible shots ...........35, 103, 181
Recharge performance ...........334
Recharging ...............................28
Pressing completely ......................44
Pressing halfway ...........................44
Printing ........................................285
Layout .....................................289
Paper settings .........................289
Photobook set-up ....................299
Print order (DPOF) ..................295
Printing effects ........................290
Tilt correction ..........................293
Trimming .................................293
Program AE .........................142, 204
Program shift ..........................143
Protect (image erase protection) ...265
Q
Q
(Quick Control) ...49, 83, 185, 215, 249
Quick Control Dial .........................46
Quick mode .................................197
R
Rating mark .................................247
RAW ....................................102, 104
RAW image processing ...............272
RAW+JPEG ................................102
Recharging ....................................28
Recording level ...........................218
Reduced display ..................242, 244
Index
Release shutter without card ........ 32
Remote control shooting ............. 167
Remote switch shooting .............. 167
Resizing ...................................... 277
Rotation (image) ......... 246, 270, 293
S
Safety precautions ...................... 382
Safety shift .................................. 306
Saturation .................................... 116
Scene icons ........................ 183, 207
Scene Intelligent Auto ................... 66
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization .... 175
Self-timer ............................. 100, 168
Sensor cleaning .......................... 279
Sepia (monochrome) ............ 84, 117
Sharpness ................................... 116
Shooting function settings
display ................................... 48, 333
Shooting information display ....... 238
Shooting mode .............................. 24
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ........ 146
B (Bulb) ................................... 154
w (Custom shooting) ............ 328
M (Manual exposure) .............. 148
P (Program AE) ...................... 142
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ........... 144
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..... 66
C (Creative Auto) ................... 71
SCN (Special scene) ................ 74
2 (Portrait) .......................... 75
3 (Landscape) ................... 76
4 (Close-up) ....................... 77
5 (Sports) .......................... 78
6 (Night Portrait) ................. 79
F (Handheld Night Scene) .... 80
G (HDR Backlight Control) ... 81
Shooting mode's settable functions ... 342
Shooting orientation registration ... 310
Shutter button ............................... 44
Shutter synchronization .............. 175
Shutter-priority AE ...................... 144
Silent shooting
Continuous shooting ................ 98
Silent LV shooting .......... 190, 223
Single shooting ........................ 98
Single shooting ....................... 73, 98
Single-image display .................. 236
Single-point AF ............................. 94
Slide show .................................. 257
Small (image-recording quality) ... 103, 277
Software ..................................... 390
Speaker ...................................... 253
Special scene mode ..................... 74
Sports ........................................... 78
Spot metering ............................. 150
S-RAW (Small RAW) .................. 104
sRGB .......................................... 140
Stopped-down aperture .............. 147
Strap ............................................. 27
System map ............................... 354
T
Temperature warning ......... 201, 233
Time code ................................... 220
Time zone ..................................... 36
Tone priority ............................... 130
Toning effect (monochrome) ...... 117
Trimming (for printing) ................ 293
Tripod socket ................................ 21
Tv (shutter-priority AE) ............... 144
U
USB (digital) terminal ......... 286, 388
399
Index
V
Video snapshot album ................ 225
Video snapshots ......................... 225
Video system .............. 216, 264, 351
Viewfinder ..................................... 23
Dioptric adjustment ................... 43
Electronic level ................. 60, 326
Viewing on TV ..................... 251, 261
Volume (movie playback) ........... 254
W
Warning icon ............................... 313
WB (white balance) ..................... 120
Bracketing .............................. 124
Color temperature setting ....... 122
Correction ............................... 123
Custom ................................... 121
Personal ................................. 122
Wi-Fi ........................................... 351
Wind filter .................................... 218
400
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of February 2017. For
information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version of the Instruction
Manual, refer to the Canon website.
CEL-ST6QA214
© CANON INC. 2017
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement